Home

Canon 7428B007 Camcorder User Manual

Contents

1. 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located on the front bumper under the grill 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open 364 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 6L V8 Windshield washer fluid reservoir Transmission fluid dipstick 4 6L 2V only Brake fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Air filter assembly Power steering fluid reservoir Power distribution box Engine oil filler cap CONA TKR WD Battery 365 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 4L V8 Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Air filter assembly Power steering fluid reservoir Power distribution box Engine oil filler cap CONAN A WY Battery 366 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID lt 7 Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise str
2. e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated up until the courtesy lamps come on e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off The reading portion the two outer lights can only be turned on and off at the lamp Rear courtesy reading cargo lamps if equipped The rear lamps can be turned on when the panel dimmer control is rotated until the lamps come on or when any door is opened C CG The lamps can be turned on or off by sliding the control e When the control is in the middle position the lamp will come on when a door is opened or the unlock button is pressed on the remote keyless entry e If the control is moved to the left position the lamp will stay on e If the control is moved to the right position the lamp will not come on at all tht 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Ambient lighting if equipped Iuminates footwells and cupholders with a choice of several colors The ambient lighting control is located on the floor console To activate press and release the left side of the control to cycle through the color choices plus the off state Press the right side of the control to adjust color intensity The lights come on whenever the ignition is in either the on or accessory position Note The ambient lights will stay on until the ignition is placed in the off position and either of the front do
3. 400 ete 330 WS NULS airean 337 positioning 0330 Lumbar support seats 152 153 STOTIS E vi asvcddecneassceesateehenaspecnecs 330 M Jump starting your vehicle 338 Message center ossessi 22 30 K english metric button 26 35 system check button 0 35 cle ag system ir warning messages 26 35 Keypad E86 MIMOES opoimanianhooisis DEDA locking and unlocking doors 137 automatic dimming rearview programming entry code 137 WITOLD iy eisedestesscarcscetiecseevdosteags 93 fold AWAY secisssesseitseesssascxetneeeias 95 KEYS wees vee 126 189 140 heated occ 62 64 67 95 positions of the ignition 271 programmable memory 132 side view mirrors power 94 L signal yepere akata 96 Lamps MOON POOP varnare eccrine 103 autolamp system ccceeeeee 72 Motorcraft parts 362 399 416 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus My Key 2 2 cistes saat tone oaate 141 N Navigation system eee 58 O Octane rating sosise 383 384 Oil see Engine oil 0 0 368 P Parental MyKey PYOSTAMMING skoinssparroniton ss 141 Parking brake ceeeee 278 Parts see Motorcraft parts 399 Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor 000 167 Power deployable running DOALS e errre eea eiS 97 Power distribution box See FUSES eeeeeereeeees 322 325 Power door locks 0
4. 2010 F 150 f12 253 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Gew GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5 000 lb 2 268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5 000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to
5. 267 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Trailer towing tips e Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached e If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective Also see the information on tow haul mode operation under Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter e The trailer tongue weight should be 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditions at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification Remember that regardless of the rear axle lube used do not tow a trailer for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles 800 km of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 118 km h with no full throttle starts e After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts e To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C effici
6. 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 After the code is entered the locks will cycle confirming that the new code has been set Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code e If you set a second personal code it will erase your first personal code Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Press and release 1 e 2 then 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 1 Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry keypad To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other Note The driver s door will unlock and the interior lamps will illuminate after the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code are correctly entered To unlock all doors press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To lock all doors press the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time You do not need to enter the keypad code first Note The interior lamps will turn off 137 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI TH
7. 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e When this feature is enabled AUTO the running boards will move back to the correct positions based off of the door positions Bounce back e If an object is in the way of the moving running board the running board will automatically bounce back in the reverse direction and move to the end of travel Note The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures In adverse conditions debris such as mud dirt and salt may become trapped in the running board mechanism possibly leading to unwanted noise If this occurs manually set the running boards to the deployed position and flush the system in particular the front and rear hinge arms with a high pressure car wash wand Note Do not use the running boards front and rear hinge assemblies running board motors or the running board under body mounts to lift the vehicle when jacking Please utilize proper jacking points Refer to Changing the tires in the Roadside Emergencies chapter WARNING In extreme climates excessive ice buildup may occur causing the running boards not to deploy Be sure that the running boards have deployed and have finished moving before attempting to step on them Note The running boards will resume normal function once the blockage is cleared WARNING Turn off the running boards before jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between
8. 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster e When the ignition is in the off A position the indicator will flash once every two seconds to R indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate normal system functionality If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position If this occurs turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no electronic interference with the programmed key If the vehicle doesn t start try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful contact your authorized dealership for key replacement If the indicator still flashes rapidly or glows steadily the vehicle will not start contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off position Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the vehicle Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle a
9. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Using your vehicle with a snowplow For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a snowplow refer to the Driving chapter Using your vehicle as an ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles Before you drive your vehicle please read this Owner s Guide carefully Your vehicle is not a passenger car As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury or death 6 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing
10. Seating and Safety Restraints Using the power lumbar support if equipped The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat Press the forward side of the control for additional support Press the rear side of the control to reduce support 7 N 7 N Adjusting the front power seat if equipped WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket if equipped when a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Refer to Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental res
11. AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS Te ee The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries The term supplemental restraint means the airbags are intended as a supplement to the safety belts Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy and airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not deploy The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of e driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags side airbags and Safety Canopy Refer to Seat mounted side airbag system and Safety Canopy system later in this chapter e one or more impact and safing sensors e the same indicator light RCM restraints control module and diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off indicator light The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal Safety System They are designed to be deployed in cases where the Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices Refer to the Personal Safety System section in this chapter 185
12. Displayed when training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAIN RIGHT FRONT TIRE if equipped Displayed when training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAIN RIGHT REAR TIRE if equipped Displayed when training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAIN LEFT REAR TIRE if equipped Displayed when training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TIRES NOT TRAINED REPEAT if equipped Displayed when an error occurs while training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAINING COMPLETE if equipped Displayed when training of the TPMS system is complete Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information MY KEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY Displayed at startup when MyKey is in use Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the Admin has enabled
13. Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all four wheels at reduced speeds Intended only for off road applications such as deep sand steep grades or pulling heavy objects The shift lever will not engage 4L 4X4 LOW until the transmission is in N neutral and the vehicle is moving below 3 mph 5 km h this is normal and should be no reason for concern Refer to Shifting to from 4L 4X4 Low for proper operation Shifting between 2H 4X2 and 4H 4X4 high e Move the transfer case lever between 2H 4X2 and 4H 4X4 High at a stop or any forward speed 302 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Note Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while preforming a shift will improve engagement disengagement times Note Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping Note Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages this is normal Note 4X4 High mode is not intended for use on dry pavement Shifting to from 4L 4X4 Low 1 Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less 2 Place the transmission in N Neutral 3 Move the transfer case lever through N Neutral directly to the desired position e If the transfer case will not engage into 4L 4X4 Low do not force the lever Allow the vehicle to coast at a speed below 3 mph 5 km h then repeat Steps 2 and 3 Note Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages this is normal Note 4X4 L
14. Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage 104 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes refer to Programming in this section Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the accessory position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 1 Position the end of your hand held
15. _ indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing 391 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX li
16. 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module WARNING Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position WARNING Do not put anything on or over the airbag module Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury 186 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Se
17. Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 239 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size ERAH Ty 3416180016 1054 Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Associat
18. Entertainment Systems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you create While various P 4 mp3 O files may be present files with L A mp3 extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored r fi mps 3 by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety fi mps of tasks on your work computer LJI mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system PT L1 mp3 7 F doc j El ppt L xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best locatio
19. FA 1883 FA 1883 FA 1883 Battery BTX 59 or BTX 59 or BTX 59 or BTX 65 650 BTX 65 650 BTX 65 650 Oil Filter FL 820 S FL 820 S FL 820 S ATE 1 For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used Heavy duty battery if equipped 399 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications T0 9T 7 Pe10 oo moy a4 syrenb 6 9T TV TSEL6N SSM quese Sumogyq YIM 10 S1 L DA quURTOOD susug ppop send g GT Unud oJLeI10 0W GEED syenb p 9T epeur TO 1030W OTJoYJUAS JIEN UOL OC MG AVS Velo1OJO e i sjrenb 10 oUuIsUd IdV pue Y 0E60ZN SSM epeueo o 1 ve I wa peueg IOJO W umuq Jadng GISAT OG ME OX0 OGMG AVS eYeso1ojo ye yue OOD urgu P G yuelood surgu AE TYP que ood susu AZ T9 P epeueo sn ZIdSTOZMS OX9 TO 104014 oMeIUAS mq SA SAO 0Z MS OX OS MS AVS oIJeII040 e SM dSb 0ZMG OXe sm to 1o01 pur C 9 SHEP 0 9 lo ouuo 19 F onayyUdg ummoId OZ MG AVS oIJLeIo10 oe TV S909IN SSM pmi IJOAI S 1 NLIJ PTY A 1070 MIT oer 10 V Z909N SSM ALIT STIINA TOJO pmy ayerq 1 9 T
20. If your volume is muted and MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED is displayed refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information AM FM stereo system if equipped VOL PUSH CLK A __ 2 6 6 AUDIO AM FM v 1 2 3 4 5 6 S WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which allows you to operate the radio and other electrical accessories for up to ten minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front door is opened 40 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems LA YV Press A V to manually go up or down the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies Also use in AUDIO mode to gain access to various settings 2 AUDIO Press AUDIO repeatedly to gain access to the following settings BAL Balance Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting Use A IV lt q SEEK P to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FAD Fade Press AUDIO to reach the fade feature Use
21. S 7 f 7 CAT FOLD I4 SEEK Pl i SOUND ma 42 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the radio and other electrical accessories may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened Note Your vehicle is equipped with a unique audio system If your display shows six small circles in the display your audio system is a CD6 system six disc changer If not your system is a single CD system Setting the clock To set the time press CLOCK The display will read SET TIME Use the memory preset numbers 0 9 to enter in the desired time hours and minutes The clock will then begin from that time AM FM Radio Q VOL Power Volume Press to turn the radio on off Turn the knob to increase decrease volume cm 639 NE If the volume is set above a certain N Yi level and the ignition is turned off the volume w
22. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries it may also cause minor abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or 188 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag cover as possible while maintaining vehicle control WARNING Several airbag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly s
23. and forward and back There should be no more than one inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 11 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed Installing child safety seats in cinch tongue combination lap and shoulder belt seating position Front center seating position only If you are using a regular cab center seat see Center front safety belt Regular Cab center seating position only under Combination lap and shoulder belts earlier in this chapter for instructions on attaching the mini buckle The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination lap shoulder belt and the belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap shoulder belt 208 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the Regular Cab center seating position 1 Position the child safety seat in the Regular Cab center front seat 2 If the center lap shoulder safety belt has been disconnected from the seat to carry large cargo behind the seat reconnect it by buckling the small buckle on the end of the belt into the mini buckle on the driver s side WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move se
24. cleaner housing 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Release the three clamps that a secure the cover to the air filter EN housing Push the air filter cover ZAIN toward the center of the vehicle and up slightly to release it p A 6 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 7 Install a new air filter element 8 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover and ensure that the tabs on the edge are properly x aligned into the slots ee ds ie 9 Slip the air tube onto the air filter housing and tighten the air tube clamp bolt snugly but do not overtighten it 398 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 10 Reconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector to the outlet tube Make sure the locking tab on the connector is in the locked position connector shown from below for clarity Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Component 4 6L 2V V8 4 6L 3V V8 5 4L V8 engine engine engine Air filter element
25. e In Mexico www ford com mx e In Australia www ford com au Additional owner information is given in separate publications This vehicle s Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this vehicle s Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before Lil touching or attempting adjustment of any kind 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constitu
26. or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull 285 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving LIMITED SLIP AXLE IF EQUIPPED This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface Under normal conditions the Limited slip axle functions like a standard rear axle The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working Electronic locking differential ELD axle if equipped This axle provides added traction on slippery and or off road surfaces particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface In normal driving conditions the rear axle function as a standard axle The ELD may be locked or unlocked by the vehicle operator Refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation section in this chapter for further detail on ELD function and usage When the axle is unlocked it will function like a standard rear axle When the axle is locked it will not allow the rear wheels to rotate at different speeds when turning The ELD axle is
27. possible BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake Sluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when an oil change is required XX OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON Displayed when an oil change will soon be required and shows the percentage of oil life left TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information 36 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER if equipped Displayed if there are certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring brake system Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information CHECK PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the reverse sensing system park aid is disabled TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a trailer connection becomes disconnected either intentionally or unintentionally and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED if equipped Displayed when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway For more information refer to t
28. recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed Car2U system buttons should be erased for security reasons Refer to Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons later in this section Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Car2U system Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist you in programming the transmitter Additional Car2U system information can be found on line at www learcar2U com or by calling the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 572 2728 108 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Types of garage door openers rolling code and fixed code The Car2U Home Automation System may be programmed to operate rolling code and fixed code garage door openers e Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are code protected Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every time your remote control garage door opener is used Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996 Fixed code uses the same coded signal every time It is manually programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code If you do not know if your garage door opener is a rolling code or pTTatT TTT ND fixed code device open your garage OCU UOOOOOG door opener s remote control battery CTS 206 12 T124 cover If a panel of DIP switches is present your garage door op
29. system inspected by your authorized dealer On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures the TPMS system must be retrained following every tire rotation Refer to Tire rotation in this chapter 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Possible Customer Action Required Pressure cause Warning Light Flashing Warning Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly inflated malfunction and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes have the system inspected by your authorized dealer When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase
30. when a trailer connection was determined and then a disconnection either intentionally or unintentionally has been sensed during a given ignition cycle It is also displayed if a truck or trailer wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to appear disconnected This message is also displayed during manual activation without a trailer connected 2 Manual control lever Slide the control lever to the left to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for instructions on proper use of this feature If the manual control is activated while the brake is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes e Stop Lamps Activating the TBC manual control lever will illuminate both the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except the Center High Mount Stop Lamp presuming proper trailer electrical connection Pressing the vehicle brake pedal will also illuminate both trailer and vehicle brake lamps Procedure for adjusting GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing conditions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weather 264 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer b
31. windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element ENGINE OIL S27 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 368 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again e If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between the MIN and MAX marks depending on application the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL e If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark add enough oil to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the MIN MAX range Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine damage Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back i
32. 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Press the SELECT RESET stem to turn autounlock on or off EASY ENTRY if equipped This feature automatically moves the driver s seat backwards for easy exit entry from the vehicle Press the SELECT RESET stem to turn the easy entry exit seat on or off REAR PARK AID if equipped This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected Press the SELECT RESET stem to turn the rear park assist on or off TRAILER SWAY if equipped This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway Press the SELECT RESET stem to turn trailer sway on or off CREATE MYKEY MYKEY SETUP CLEAR MYKEY MyKey allows you to program a restricted driving mode on one standard key supplied with the vehicle or any programmed spare key To create MyKey refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter LANGUAGE ENGLISH SPANISH FRENCH Note When returning to the setup menu and a non English language has been selected HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to change back to English Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to change back to English Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in Selectable languages are English Spanish or French Waiting four seconds or pressing the SELECT RESET stem cycles the message center through each of the language choices Press
33. 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter MPG Lkm This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from poor economy to f excellent economy Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy When your vehicle is not moving this function shows one or no bars illuminated Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset TIMER Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time To operate do the following 1 Press and release RESET in order to start the timer 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET until the timer resets System check and vehicle feature customization Press the SETUP button repeatedly to cycle the message center through we ae RESET the following features RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK When this message appears press the RESET button and the message center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a status of the item if needed Note Some systems show a message only if a condition is present 1 XXX OIL LIFE 2 CHARGING SYSTEM 3 DOOR STATUS 4 BRAKE SYSTEM 5 XX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL XXX 6 TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER if equipped and no trailer connected 7 TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT Gf equipped and trailer connected 8 MYKEY DISTANCE if program
34. Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 199 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http Avww nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to
35. Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Battery relearn Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance Flexible fuel vehicles FFV must also relearn the ethanol content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the rel
36. Close the tailgate 119 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The cargo management system consists of the Cargo rail package with the following as optional accessories e Front header bar if equipped e Cross bars if equipped e Bed divider if equipped e Side mounted tool bins Gf equipped Cargo rail package The strong extruded aluminum double channel rails and four adjustable cleats are designed to hold loads up to 600 Ib 272 kg per cleat maximum of two cleats per rail e Cleat positions are adjusted by pulling the knob and turning slightly to lock open The cleat can then be moved along the rail Once the desired position is reached return the knob to the horizontal position Pull the cleat side to side to ensure it has locked into the next available hole location e To remove cleat from rail pull the knob and turn slightly to lock open and slide it off the end of the rail When installing cleat reverse instructions above 120 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Note When replacing a cleat into the rail make sure the oval embossed on the knob is not upside down This will ensure that the cleat is properly oriented to accept accessory attachments Front header bar Spans the header area of the pickup box providing the function of a header rail e Attachment cleats fro
37. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements 309 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs Parking On some
38. F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To erase programming on the Car2U system individual buttons cannot be erased use the following procedure 1 Firmly press the two outside Car2U system buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights begin to blink rapidly The indicator lights are located directly above the buttons NZ 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release your fingers from the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U system it is recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance The Car2U system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes and modifications to the Car2U system transmitter by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the equipment TAILGATE LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a tailgate lock designed to help prevent theft of the tailgate e Insert ignition key and turn to the right to engage lock e Turn ignition key to the left to unlock 113 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide
39. Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http Avww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercayr gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 352 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect depo
40. If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner use another premium leather conditioner e Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking delivery of your vehicle Condition twice yearly in order to replenish lost oils and revitalize the aroma suppleness and resilience of the leather e Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section e Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel sized amount of conditioner to a clean dry cloth e Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears Allow the conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior If a film appears wipe off film with a dry clean cloth UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt 361 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom B
41. Insert accessory into desired T slot and install end support When tightening Torx head bolts hand tightening with a Torx driver is sufficient DO NOT over torque by using a ratchet 122 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Bed divider This panel will keep small items up to 400 Ib 180 kg in position in the pickup box Also includes T slots to allow attachment of industry standard roof rack accessories e To remove bed divider lift handle on each side and lift end support shroud off of the cleat To install bed divider align cleats directly across from each other on the lower rail Then place divider end support onto the cleats and press down on each side until the latch handle cycles up then press the handle down to secure pull up on the divider to ensure they are securely attached To install accessories into T slots remove bed divider then find the slip joint end indicated with an arrow embossed on the support Using a T25 Torx driver remove two Torx head bolts and slide end support off of the aluminum extrusion Insert accessory into desired T slot and install end support When tightening Torx head bolts hand tightening with a Torx driver is sufficient DO NOT over torque by using a ratchet 123 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Side mounted tool bins Watertight bins can be positioned at any point along the side rails and can be easil
42. MyKey Optional Settings Turn the ignition on using an Admin key To program the optional settings use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETUP is displayed 2 Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey setup menus The first menu shown is MYKEY MAX MPH lt 80 MPH gt OFF 3 If you don t want to change the maximum speed setting press the SETUP button to display the next menu The remaining menus appear as follows with the default settings shown MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 lt OFF gt MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT lt ON gt OFF MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON lt OFF gt 4 On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the Sic 5 Press SETUP to enter your choice The next optional setting will be displayed 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional settings 142 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Disable MyKey To reset all MyKeys as Admin keys do the following 1 Turn the vehicle on using the Admin key 2 Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed 3 Press and release the RESET button HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR is displayed 4 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed Check MyKey System Status The vehicle System Check will provide the status of the following MyKey parameters e MYKEY MILES This odometer o
43. Nd LOC VuUeULtoj og uo XVIN NIIN USIH Yeso1010 useM og Jequinu j1ed pIo J0 oweU Ied pIo 3 S So SHILIOVdVO ANY SNOILVOISIDAdS LONGOYd AONVNALNIVIN pm oyeg Owners Guide 1st Printing 2010 F 150 f12 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications AT eNOOUdIN NIO O1SLX A eNooddn WD S LX d 60 IW aSa SIX 10 X agLOTA Vsa T X V c6IOGCNC ISM TO OVIMSL AX V L6TOCN dSM TO 06 M08 AX 9T LET66NW SSM 9OA uorneIyn ds pIo Jequinu aed pIo ALV AT oNODYYN JJeIoI0J OW Pm ese I JSULIL JeI0I0 OW ALV A NOOYYN JJeIoI0J OW astern sodmg YMNW aYLIdIOJON asvaly JrJ 8SUu0T wns pUeoLIqn oXy oToy WAS voy OPT MGL AVS eo10joW qyueoLIqn T y Ieey MWI 06 M08 AVS eTI0JOW SloT 9d LoT dois woyskg SUT OOD Je1N10 OJ queTeatmnba IO oweU Ied pIo Cursu AZ T9 P g TZ eL syrenb 6ST CIST sqaenb 9 T JIOAJ S J UO SUIT XVI pue NIN u M79q 0 MA C197 squtd g g TST squtd g g AGLYP PMY UOIssTUsueIg onewomy AMY PXP pm eseo I JSULIL pmy Suliae s IaMog wae Yayo IOOp pue osury 100p Jey Jong syorr yeas soyetd Jays soyoyey sosutpy yeys Tepod ayeiq soard pue s geyur ayeiq SuIed 3U9 S UOISSTUSULIL ping o Xe YU GL 6 8 8 TEA XP axe quor sjoped yeoT doys w s s SulOOD 401 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2010 F 150 f12 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications oV 9TASW ASM V GE OZ AT eNOO
44. Overdrive position this engine braking will slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when descending a grade Depending on driving conditions and load conditions the transmission may downshift slow the vehicle and control the vehicle speed when descending a hill without the accelerator pedal being pressed The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed To deactivate the Tow Haul feature and return to normal driving mode press the button on the end of the gearshift lever The TOW HAUL light will no longer be illuminated When you shut off and restart the engine the transmission will automatically return to normal D Overdrive mode Tow Haul OFF 295 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not use the Tow Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control 3 Third Transmission operates in third gear only Used for improved traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides engine braking 2 Second Transmission operates in 2nd gear only Use 2 Second to start up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Transmission operates in 1st gear only e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by movi
45. RESET stem TRIP A XXX X mi once to switch from the odometer to 0 0 mi the trip odometer Press the stem again to select Trip A and Trip B features To reset the trip press and hold the stem until it resets e With optional message center see TRIP A B under Message center in this chapter 20 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Tachometer if equipped Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure The needle should stay in the normal operating range between L and H If the needle falls below the normal range stop the vehicle turn off the engine and check the engine oil level Add oil if needed If the oil level is correct have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the on position The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the Vd vehicle is in motion or on a grade The arrow next to the fuel pump icon indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler inlet is located For more information refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Transmission fluid temperature gauge If the gauge is in the Normal area normal the transmission fluid is withi
46. Right front passenger seat e Rear seats if equipped 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 177 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING After any vehicle collision the safety belt systems at all seating positions except the driver position which does not have this feature must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and right front passenger seating positions The safety
47. SI dOIAIOS poyoodsns SI Yeo L SSeTUN posueYyO IO peyxDaYO oq 0 PAU JOU OP SJULOLIqN S F 1OJ poyeoliqny peteplsuod st pue JULIN Xe Teel M YJU S amp YM poy ST L Iva S PTY A INOJ Sopxe YOT UOTORAT YOU GL 6 PUL YOUT g g JO TTY ejo dwiod 107 V STTOZINALSA uoryeoyioods ploy Suau Ju eamb 10 E TX IMPON UOT IAMPPY JO TW ETT ZO p ppv QORJAMNS OAV L UO PWA OY YM JOY T yy JO W0 0q oY MOTE Wu PT 9 YOUT 9T 6 P T 0 AXL oy SUMY Aq poutumtejep st Apoedeo od dTAIEG aponyea MoA ut peddinbe Ayfeurst10 ad Jueqooo y PpY YILU UOLO TTY 9U PUL V OS6OZN SSM UONLIYP ds pIo Jo syuswesmMbel y Joour ATUO p u IO ursuy ATOYEpUUT JOu ST IO 1070W pu jq IN YJU S IO IN YJU S JO as reuondo IZ 9ET xoq 8 qegI dng suor es 0 9 X0q g 9 qegI dng paepueis Tr 86 XOG 8 qe say suos 09 que ony Jequinu aed pIo J0 oweU Ied p10 oO lt 0 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2010 F 150 f12 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA engine engine Fuel 87 octane 87 octane 87 octane or ee Ethanol E85 Firing order _ 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 1 32 1 42mm 1 0 1 1mm 1 0 1 1mm ratio 404 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Engine drivebelt routing IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administrat
48. To open cupholder ashtray push in on the door and release The door will spring out 1 4 inches Then pull cupholder ashtray assembly out the remaining distance to utilize To close push assembly in completely and release Ashtray if equipped The ashtray is located on the instrument panel To open ashtray push in on the door and release The ashtray assembly will tip out To close push assembly in completely and release Up level ashtray shown base similar POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED A WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings 91 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first detent and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close Rear Window Buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise This noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to three inches One touch down Allows the driver s window to open fully without holding the control down Press
49. USA fus Introduction NOTICE TO OWNERS OF THE F150 Note Your vehicle is equipped with high performance tires When first driving the vehicle after it has been parked for a period of time you may experience a temporary ride disturbance This is a characteristic of the tires and should be no reason for concern The condition should correct itself within 5 15 miles 8 25 km of driving If the disturbance persists have the tires serviced by an authorized dealer DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information Event Data Recording Other modules
50. Wheel lug nut torque 337 Jump starting 338 Wrecker towing 344 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Customer Assistance 346 Reporting safety defects U S only 352 Reporting safety defects Canada only 352 Cleaning 353 Maintenance and Specifications 363 Engine compartment 365 Engine oil 368 Battery 371 Engine coolant 373 Fuel information 379 Air filter s 396 Part numbers 399 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 400 Engine data 404 Accessories 408 Ford Extended Service Plan 410 Index 413 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2009 Ford Motor Company 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Motor Company product Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca
51. a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats and safety belts e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 e If aring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s seatbelts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH SUPERCREW Your leather seating surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather For King Ranch SuperCrew leather seats refer to separate section in this chapter e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth 359 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e If the leather cannot be completely cleaned usi
52. also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged Press the up and down arrows on the right side of the screen to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle e i Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e fA Distributes air through the instrument panel vents floor vents rear seat floor vents and de mister vents e lt Distributes air through the floor vents rear seat floor vents GA Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents de mister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging To return to full automatic control press AUTO on the main bezel Fan Speed Press to decrease increase the fan speed Dual Press to activate deactivate separate driver and passenger temperature controls Max A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press MAX A C again for normal operation 69 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIMATE MODE Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the Navigation supplement for more information on using voice commands with the climate control system Oper
53. an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 376 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentr
54. and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system Both the driver s and passenger s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Minder feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature Note If you are using MyKey the Belt Minder warning will not expire Refer to MyKey
55. and retighten if necessary Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire 5 Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure every six months as per your scheduled maintenance information or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components 6 If removed install the spare tire lock Gif equipped into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key Gf equipped and jack handle WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance rotation flat tire wheel removal etc Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque em M14 x 2 0 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control 337 2010 F 150 f12 Own
56. apparent continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon C indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to the On board diagnostics OBD II description in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon tc indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon
57. approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 20 7 kPa for a drop of 30 F 16 6 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is ON visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure 245 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TPMS reset procedure The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after each tire rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires WARNING To determine the required pressure s for your vehicle refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door See Vehicle Loading in this chapter for more information Overview To provide the vehicle s load carrying capabili
58. be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to help prevent accidental unbuckling Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to step 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially
59. belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue 5 Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt 6 Before placing the child into the child seat forcibly tilt the child seat from side to side and in forward direction to make sure that the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than one inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 7 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use saf
60. braking control of your vehicle you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling not sliding or spinning Basic operating principles e Do not use 4WD on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear and may damage drive components 4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern 308 2010 F 150 f12 Owne
61. cargo behind the seat or items that might damage or soil the belt detach the belt from the seat e Release the mini buckle by inserting a key or similar object into the slot If the belt has been disconnected to carry large objects behind the seat reconnect it as follows e Buckle the small tongue on the end of the belt into the mini buckle on the driver s side The belt is now ready for use This mini buckle should stay buckled at all times unless cargo carrying makes it necessary to detach the belt Safety belt with cinch tongue Regular Cab center only The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt is stowed or while putting safety belts on When the lap shoulder safety belt is buckled the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be shortened but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting longer The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash so always wear the shoulder belt properly and don t allow any slack in either the lap or shoulder portions Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into the buckle you may have to lengthen the lap belt portion of it 172 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 To lengthen the lap belt pull some webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor 2 While holding the webbing below the tongue grasp the tip metal portion of the to
62. check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour 276 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts of power per hour Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than three hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Warning lights and chimes
63. component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components Checking 6 speed automatic transmission fluid The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer If required fluid should be added by an authorized dealer Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components 395 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRANSFER CASE FLUID IF EQUIPPED 1 Clean the fi
64. console offers several useful storage features These include 1 Cupholders 2 Tissue holder in lid 3 Power point 4 Large utility compartment has coin holder slots and a cardholder located inside on the passenger side and a pen holder on the lid WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision ELECTRONIC COMPASS IF EQUIPPED The compass heading is displayed in the Center Integrated Display CID The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass calibration adjustment Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Refer to Compass zone adjustment 88 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Compass zone adjustment 1 Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location by referri
65. control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER IF EQUIPPED 5 The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and works to defrost your rear window from fog and thin ice If equipped it also operates the heated mirror to remove snow and thin ice from the side mirrors Ensure that the ignition on Press to turn the defroster on off The indicator light will illuminate when activated For vehicles with a sliding rear window the defroster will be disabled when the window is opened Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty 71 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL Rotate the headlamp control clockwise to the first position PS to turn on the parking lamps Rotate clockwise to the second position D to also turn on the headlamps Autolamp control if equipped The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control The autolamp system also keep
66. currently playing Satellite Radio if equipped Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability SIRIUS Press repeatedly to access satellite radio mode if equipped Press repeatedly to cycle through SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes TUNE Turn to go to the next previous available SIRIUS satellite station DIRECT Press DIRECT then enter the desired channel i e 002 using the memory preset buttons 0 9 If you only enter one digit press OK and the system will go to that satellite channel If you enter three digits the system will automatically go to that channel if available You may 46 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT If an invalid station number is entered INVALID CHANNEL will appear in the display and the system will continue playing the current station SEEK Press lt SEEK P to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt SEEK P to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt SEEK P to fast seek through the previous next channels SCAN Press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels within the selected cat
67. deactivating the autolock feature using the vehicle s message center refer to Message center information in the Instrument cluster chapter CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS ON VEHICLES WITH REAR DOORS e When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside e The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e Insert the key and turn to the lock position key horizontal to engage the childproof locks e Insert the key and turn to the unlock position key vertical to disengage the childproof locks REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 130 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could
68. designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability 231 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steeri
69. doors 143 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob 3 Follow steps 1 4 in the Create a MyKey section Note For all vehicles the number of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey System Status menus will include the remote start system as an additional key in the total count See the Check MyKey System Status section Note For all vehicles with remote start installed it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys in which case you will need to use your remote start system to reset all MyKeys as Admin keys by doing the following 1 Enter the vehicle close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob 3 Follow steps 1 4 in the Disable MyKey section 144 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Troubleshooting Potential Causes Can t create a MyKey e Key in the ignition is already a MyKey e Key in the ignition is the last remaining Admin key there always has to be at least one Admin key e SecuriLock Passive Anti Theft System is disabled or in unlimited mode e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to MyKey with Remote Start Systems section Cannot program the MyKey e Key in the ignition is a MyKey optional settings e No MyKeys are
70. drive to 4WD while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and is not cause for concern WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD vehicles Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles SUV and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase 224 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces particularly in off road use As a result of the above dimensional differences SUV s and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded con
71. experience a significant reduction in power output At the earliest opportunity clear all snow and or ice away from the air induction inlet Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off 3 Make sure the gearshift is in P Park e 4 speed transmission PRND21 272 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving PRND321 e 6 speed transmission 4 4 Make sure the parking brake is set 5 Turn the key to 3 on without GB turning the key to 4 start 4 o Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights 273 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start 2 Turn the key to 4 start then release the key as soon as the engine begins cranking Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system that assists in starting the engine After releasing the key from the 4 start position the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle star
72. f to exit phone mode or end a call 102 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls For further information on the Navigation system SYNC system refer to the Navigation and SYNC supplements MOON ROOF IF EQUIPPED The moon roof control is located on the overhead console WARNING Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves WARNING When closing the moon roof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the moon roof opening The moon roof is equipped with an automatic one touch express opening and closing feature To stop motion at any time during the one touch operation press the control a second time To open the moon roof Press and release the SLIDE control the moon roof will open automatically Press the switch again to stop the moon roof To close the moon roof Pull and release the SLIDE control the moon roof will close automatically Press the switch again to stop the moon roof Bounce back When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof opening as the moon roof is closing the moon roof will automatically open and stop at a prescribed position Bounce back override To override bounce back function pull and hold the SLIDE switch within two seconds of a bounce back event The closing force will begi
73. fewer than 10 strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets RDBS Radio Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RDBS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate Press MENU repeatedly until RDBS ON OFF appears in the display Use lt SEEK to toggle RDBS ON OFF When RDBS is off you will not be able to search for RDBS equipped stations or view the station name or type CAT FOLD Category Folder This feature allows you to select from various music categories To change RDBS categories Press MENU repeatedly until RDBS ON OFF appears in the display Use lt SEEK P to toggle RDBS between ON OFF Press CAT PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDBS CATEGORY will appear in the display Press W A to scroll through all possible categories When the desired category appears in the display press lt SEEK P to find the next station playing that selection or press SCAN for a brief sampling of all stations playing that category of music 44 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems CD MP3 Player CD Press to enter CD MP3 mode If a disc is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display LOAD For a single CD system This control is not operational To load a CD simply insert the disc label si
74. flash If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the brakes to cool down In this situation TCS will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over spinning When the brakes have cooled down the system will regain all features Anti lock braking RSC and ESC are not affected by this condition and will continue to function during the cool down period The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following 281 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Electronic stability control ESC Electronic stability control ESC may enhance your vehicle s directional stability during adverse maneuvers for example when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway ESC operates by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and if necessary reducing engine power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide laterally During ESC events the sliding car icon R in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system which include but are not limited to e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle e Driving over a patch of ice or othe
75. fus Instrument Cluster OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when an oil change is required XX OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON Displayed when an oil change will soon be required and shows the percentage of oil life left WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER if equipped Displayed if there are certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring brake system Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information CHECK REAR PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse Refer to Reverse sensing system in the Driving chapter PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a trailer connection becomes disconnected either intentionally or unintentionally and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by the ABS module TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED if equipped Displayed when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway For more information refer to the Driving chapter for more information 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS Displayed on 4x4 vehicles only when 4x4 Low 4x4 High or 4x4 au
76. have the Personal Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision 169 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Safety restraints precautions WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up
77. heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the service engine soon Cc indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that
78. if equipped Displayed when training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information 37 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster TRAIN RIGHT FRONT TIRE if equipped Displayed when training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAIN RIGHT REAR TIRE if equipped Displayed when training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAIN LEFT REAR TIRE if equipped Displayed when training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TIRES NOT TRAINED REPEAT if equipped Displayed when an error occurs while training the TPMS system Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAINING COMPLETE if equipped Displayed when training of the TPMS system is complete Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information MY KEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY Displayed at startup when MyKey is in use Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more
79. in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light B RAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an anti lock braking system ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern 277 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE r
80. in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter CHECK FUEL FILL INLET Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Refer to Hasy Fuel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter CHECK 4X4 if equipped Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is present For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information 27 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA
81. in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter e Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision 204 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should
82. information VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH Displayed when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected speed Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information TOP SPEED MY KEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information 38 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO Displayed when a MyKey is in use and Belt Minder is activated Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac syst
83. it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended e Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag 190 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Pass Airbag Off Occupant en Passenger Airbag Empty seat Disabled Small child in child Lit Disabled safety seat or booster Small child with safety Lit Disabled belt buckled or unbuckled WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans f
84. light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired 198 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision SOS Post Crash Alert System The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control button e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see
85. light on the control will illuminate when activated The system automatically shuts off after 10 minutes Heated and cooled seats if equipped The controls for the climate controlled seats are located on the dual electronic automatic temperature control DEATC system 157 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Heated seats WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The heated seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the heated seats Press once to activate the high heat setting three indicator lights Continue pressing to scroll t
86. loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 249 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicl
87. may still be locked with the key in the ignition and performing one of the following actions e Pressing the manual lock button on the door e Operating the remote entry transmitter e Operating the keyless entry keypad e Operating the driver s door with a key will only lock the driver s door 126 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Autolock The autolock feature is available on vehicles with power locking This feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is in the on position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion for manual transmission the park brake should not be engaged and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h Deactivating activating autolock Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature enabled There are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer or e Performing the power door lock control procedure e Performing the keyless entry keypad if equipped procedure or e Performing the message center if equipped procedure Power door unlock lock procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehic
88. of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and your warranty may be invalidated It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible at least half a tank Do not add less than five gallons 18 9L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration If you operate your vehicle 50 or more of the time on ethanol you should follow a different maintenance schedule In addition to this if you exclusively use E85 fuel it is also recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline once every 3 000 miles 4 800 km See scheduled maintenance information for more information Fuel quality Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control syste
89. over the back of the seat and under the head restraint For vehicles with adjustable head restraints route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position e You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether anchors Make sure the seatback is locked in the upright position before installing the child seat 3 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown e Regular Cab passenger and center seats located on back panel If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases 216 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Rear seat tether strap attachment There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat a along the bottom edge of the rear window in the SuperCab and y SuperCrew These loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to three child Sa safety seat tether straps For example the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child safety seat in the cente
90. pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached 4 4 CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode allows the CD to play all tracks in all folders e MP3 folder mode limits the playable tracks to the current folder e Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files 54 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
91. rearward to remove the cover from the hinges 5 With the ignition in the on position pull back on the BSI solenoid found on top of the uncovered steering column and at the same time apply the brake pedal and shift the transmission into N Neutral 288 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving 6 Reinstall the steering column cover start the vehicle and release the parking brake Note After the transmission is shifted to N Neutral it is easier to reinstall the cover when the column is in the middle or lower tilt position WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer Brake shift interlock floor shift transmission This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not opera
92. that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum Use as short an extension cord as possible Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to
93. the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise 5 Pull bulb straight out of socket and press in the new bulb Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing high mount brake and cargo lamp bulbs Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position Le I N 1 Remove the two screws and move E3 wl the lamp assembly away from the vehicle to expose the bulb sockets 2 Remove the bulb socket by rotating counterclockwise and pulling it out of the lamp assembly 3 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb Install the new bulbs in reverse order Replacing fog lamp bulbs if equipped 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position A 2 Remove the bulb socket from the fog lamp by turning O counterclockwise 3 Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamp bulb Install the new bulb in reverse order 82 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator lamp bulbs For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer Replacing license plate lamp bulbs The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper To change D the license plate lamp bulbs N 1 Reach behind the rear bumper to a e E locate the bulb 2 Twist the bulb socket e n counterclockwise and carefully pull to remove it from the lamp i assembly 3 Pull out t
94. the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 237 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under cont
95. the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than one inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 10 Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the lap shoulder belt The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt tight during a collision 11 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Installing child safety seats in the front row lap belt seating positions SuperCab and SuperCrew WARNING Installing a child safety seat in the front row lap seating position should be avoided if at all possible The passenger sensing system does not recognize child seats in the front center seating position 211 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never place a rear facing child seat in the front center seating position of a vehicle with rear seating positions 1 Lengthen the lap belt To lengthen the belt hold the tongue so that its bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the tongue up the webbing 2 Place the child safety seat in the center seating position 3 Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions 4 Insert the
96. the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved 98 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Setting speed control The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience 1 Press the ON control and release it 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press the SET or SET control and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note Driver Controls e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill e If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed e If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Disengaging speed control To disengage the speed control e Depress the brake pedal Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 99 Driver Controls Resuming a set speed Press the RESUME control and release it This will automatic
97. the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 339 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 340 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional thre
98. the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Note The rear window switches will not illuminate when the window control is in the locked position 92 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Power sliding back window if equipped Press and hold the amp the control to open the window all the way to the full open position Pull and hold the control to close the window Tut supe E WARNING When operating the power sliding back window you must ensure all rear seat occupants and or cargo are not in the proximity of the back window WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power sliding back window They may seriously injure themselves Accessory delay if equipped With accessory delay the window switches may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position or until any door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets yo
99. the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 lb 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity 255 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1400 440 1200 240 lb No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 lb 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1400 440 900 60 lb Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driv
100. to Changing tires with TPMS in this section 243 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Solid Warning Light Tire s under inflated Spare tire in use TPMS malfunction Tire rotation without sensor training 244 Possible Customer Action Required cause 1 Check your tire pressure to ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 32 km h before the light will turn OFF Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section If your tires are properly inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON have the
101. transmitter 1 3 inches tt 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program located on your visor while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents 3 Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light 105 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 4 through 6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 4 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button usually near wher
102. unbuckled state e After Step 3 the restraint system warning light airbag light will be turned on for three seconds 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the restraint system warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the restraint system warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the restraint system warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611C22 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso 184 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints
103. undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot 358 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with
104. vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 4WD vehicles equipped with an electronic shift transfer case Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 270 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Off locks the automatic transmission gearshift lever and 3 allows key removal Note The ignition key cannot be 2 removed from the ignition unless 4 the gearshift lever is securely D latched in P Park 2 Accessory allows the electrical G accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running 3 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine don t press the accelerator befo
105. vehicles have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel fill inlet Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor beer and wine It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn and sugar cane When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels a small amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use The resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is denatured with 2 to 5 gasoline and is suitable for automotive use During the summer season fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85 denatured ethanol Ed85 and 15 unleaded gasoline The fuel ethanol has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power Winter blends may contain up to 75 denatured ethanol Ed75 and up to 25 unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts Severely cold weather may require additional measures for reliable starting Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline It corrodes some metals and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell break down or become brittle and crack especially when mixed with gasoline Special materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers WARNING Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable If your vehicle is not serviced in accordan
106. with the deactivation activation programming procedure Note If you are using MyKey the Belt Minder cannot be disabled Also if the Belt Minder has been previously disabled it will be re enabled after the use of MyKey Refer to MyKey in the Locks and security chapter The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park e The ignition switch is in the off position e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled 183 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the on position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately one minute e Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times ending in the
107. you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 410 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings Spark pinge except e Shock absorbers California e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford
108. you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires O As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to det
109. 00 6350 8400 3810 15300 6940 9700 4400 17000 7711 11300 5126 SuperCrew 4x4 157 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 7600 3448 9200 4173 8000 3629 9500 4309 mO Ge 17100 7756 11100 5035 Maximum GCWR and trailer weight when equipped with Max Trailer Tow package Trailer frontal area considerations e Not to exceed towing vehicle frontal area 36 square feet 3 4 square meters without the Class IV trailer towing package e Not to exceed 60 square feet 5 52 square meters with the Class IV trailer towing package excluding vehicles with 3 15 rear axle ratio e Not to exceed 45 square feet 4 18 square meters with the Class IV trailer towing package for vehicles with 3 15 rear axle ratio only 261 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note Do not exceed trailer weight of 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg when towing with bumper only Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle s bumper or attach to the axle You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Weight distributing hitch When hooking up a trail
110. 000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 347 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking ac
111. 010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Note The default setting for the rear camera delay is off Press the Settings button found on the navigation screen if equipped to set the rear camera delay feature to on or off When towing the camera system will only see what is being towed behind the vehicle this might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen The camera lens for the camera is located on the tailgate Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner Note If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted it may be covered with water droplets snow mud or any other substance If this occurs clean the camera lens before using the camera system WARNING The camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system WARNING Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle WARNING Do not use the camera system with the tailgate open If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged then check with you
112. 04 Gas cap see Fuel cap 381 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 00006 386 GOUB ES aiea E E 18 transmission fluid temperature gauge ceecee 22 H Hazard flashers c0cccccceee 320 Headlamps serris 72 AMINE passes cassticesnensacsenecvesses 74 75 autolamp SySteM eirinen 72 bulb specifications 0 79 daytime running lights 74 flash TO PASS 3s ces0hsdaxcsvssehervseusss 73 High DEA aerorose irises 73 replacing bulbs ee 79 turning on and off 0 72 415 Index Heating bulb replacement heating and air conditioning specifications Chart 0 79 SYSTEM si cssnsssesscenecness 59 62 64 67 daytime running light 74 Homelink wireless control lamps aeaN Ah dahiasu auras E T 73 SyS teI erretoki aR E 104 eadlamps ssssssssssssssisssssssssnns T2 headlamps flash to pass 73 HOO sunra a den 364 interior lamps o an 76 77 I replacing bulbs 79 83 LATCH anchors isirsssicrsiirisers 212 TENIO seescishiedensetieencts 271 404 405 Lights warning and indicator 12 Illuminated visor mirror 87 anti lock brakes ABS 278 Infant seats Limited slip axle 286 pace Olly Seals stasis 204 Load HMits svarene 249 A Ce UM 39 Loading instructions 256 Locks Instrument panel Cleaning sssrin aea o cam a CUSTE eee e 12 CEPTON preteens asain et GOOMS pearen 126 J Lubricant specifications
113. 0cc0e 126 Power mirrors eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 94 Power point oo ceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 90 Power steering secnrsinarsarors 285 fluid checking and adding 392 fluid refill capacity 0 0 0 400 fluid specifications 400 Power Windows ccccceseeeees 91 Preparing to drive your VENICIE oe eeecccceeessceseeseeeesseneeees 286 R RAO ssahetssessinicdsiacsncbediedaveiouss 40 42 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus OCD in dahi oirnn reremen 42 Rear heated seats 165 Rear view camera system 299 Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for CHILGTEN inaenda 202 RELAYS a iivesseecs etsencaioseesteictienass 321 Remote entry system 0 130 illuminated entry cc 135 locking unlocking doors 131 132 panic alarm ceeeceeeeeeees 132 replacement additional transmitters 20 cesses ssynceeceresecesccs 134 replacing the batteries 133 Reverse sensing system 297 Roadside assistance 66 319 S Safety belts see Safety restraints 166 170 172 176 177 179 Safety Canopy 193 194 196 Safety defects reporting 352 Safety restraints 166 170 172 176 179 Belt Minder 180 Belt Minder deactivating activating 183 extension assembly 184 for adults 171 172 176 177 for ChIIGKeN sssaaa 199 lap pelt arresero ai 174 Occupant C
114. 11200 5080 Maximum GCWR and trailer weight when equipped with Max Trailer Tow package SuperCab 4x2 163 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR kg Clb trailer weight kg Ib 5 4L Heavy 3 73 17100 7756 11300 5126 Duty SuperCab 4x4 163 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 5 4L Heavy 3 73 17100 7756 11100 5035 Duty 259 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading SuperCrew 4x2 145 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 7 4 61 3V 54L SuperCrew 4x2 145 wheelbase Harley Davidson Version Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR lb kg trailer weight lb kg SuperCrew 4x4 145 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg cae 7700 3403 9300 Q218 8100 G67 9600 4355 3 73 15500 7031 9600 4355 17100 7756 11200 5080 Maximum GCWR and trailer weight when equipped with Max Trailer Tow package 260 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading SuperCrew 4x4 145 wheelbase Harley Davidson Version Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg SuperCrew4x2 157 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 5100 2313 5600 2540 8000 3629 9300 4218 140
115. 12 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum req
116. 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Tailgate removal Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading WARNING Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling from vehicle which could result in compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle occupants or others Note If equipped with a rearview camera system RCS do Steps 1 through 3 before removing the tailgate 1 Before removal of the tailgate locate and disconnect the tailgate in line connector under the pickup box on the passenger side of the vehicle near the spare tire 2 Install a protective cap located in the glove box onto the in line RCS connector that remains under the pickup box 3 Partially lower tailgate and carefully feed tailgate harness up through the gap between the pickup box and the bumper Place the tailgate harness out of the way under the pickup box 4 Lower the tailgate 5 Using a screwdriver gently pry the spring clip on each connector past the head of the support screw Disconnect cable 6 Disconnect the other cable 7 Lift tailgate to a 45 degree angle from horizontal 8 Lift right side off of its hinge 9 Lift tailgate to a 80 degree angle from horizontal 10 Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right To install follow the removal procedures in reverse order 114 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing U
117. 4 Low for proper operation AWD indicator lights The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the reconfigurable telltale RTT location under the following conditions Refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter e 4X2 Momentarily illuminates when 2H is selected on electronic 4x2 shift 4WD systems only X e AWD Illuminates when AWD is selected All Wheel Drive equipped vehicles only AWD e 4X4 HIGH Illuminates when 4H 4x4 is selected HIGH 301 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e 4X4 LOW Illuminates when 4L 4x4 is selected LOW T Iluminates when the electronic locking differential ELD is selected Gif equipped e CHECK 4X4 Displays when a 4X4 fault is present Note When a 4X4 system fault is present the system will typically remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition occurring It will not default to 4X2 in all circumstances When this warning is displayed have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer Using a manual 4WD system if equipped 2H 4X2 Power to the rear wheels only used for street and highway driving Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds 4H 4X4 High Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off road situations Not intended for use on dry pavement N Neutral No power to either front or rear wheels 4L 4X4 Low
118. 400 750 5 x 150 650 lb In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 Ib 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1400 1100 150 150 lb Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 6 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of
119. 4WD vehicles when the transfer case is in the N Neutral position the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline Therefore the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P Park or the manual transmission is in gear Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer 4WD Systems 4WD when you select a 43WD mode uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case On 4WD vehicles the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in this chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be 310 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar w
120. A IV lt q SEEK to adjust the audio between the front F and back B speakers TREB Treble Press to adjust the treble setting Use A IV lt q SEEK to adjust BASS Bass Press to adjust the bass setting Use A IV lt q SEEK P to adjust 3 SEEK Press lt Q SEEK P to access the previous next strong station 4 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 5 AM FM Press AM FM to select Po AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 41 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 6 ON OFF Volume Press VOL PUSH VOL PUSH to turn ON OFF Turn VOL PUSH to increase decrease volume 7 CLK Clock Press CLK to toggle between displaying the radio frequency and the clock setting Setting the clock Press and hold CLK until the hours begin to flash Press A IV lt lt SEEK gt to manually increase decrease the hours Press CLK again to set the minutes using A IV lt q SEEK gt to manually increase decrease the minutes Allow 10 seconds to pass to confirm that the time has been set AM FM in dash CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if2fsfagfsfe 7J soo LOAD l CLOCK DIRECT L SCAN an o AN SIRIUS AUX N J TEXT v A MENU L x
121. EEK P to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels 1 7 Increasing the level from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Extra Features AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through LINE IN auxiliary audio mode and SYNC if equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC please refer to supplemental information on SYNC OK Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK For further information refer to S AA supplemental information on SYNC Phone If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC press to access SYNC PHONE features For further information please refer to supplemental information on SYNC If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC the display may read NO PHONE Audio system Navigation system based if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system it will have an integrated navigation audio system See the Navigation system supplement for operating instructions on using this audio system Auxiliary input jack Line in if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can resul
122. EFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition Your vehicle comes with two coded keys additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle 138
123. ERVICE ADVANCETRAC Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible OPTIONAL MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime The message center display is located in the instrument cluster RESET TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press and release INFO button until the A or B trip appears in the display this represents the trip mode Press and hold the RESET button to reset 30 Info Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following features 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to English MYKEY MILES km If programmed For more information refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter MILES km TO E This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty Press RESET to clear this warning mes
124. K when the desired category appears in the 47 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems display After a category is selected press lt SEEK P to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu SONG SEEK MENU Press OK to enter song seek menu Press WV A to scroll through the following options a SAVE THIS SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song s title in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 song titles If you attempt to save more than 20 titles the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved titles and press W A to cycle through the saved titles When the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display b DELETE A SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press W A to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for con
125. L CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED Radio control features Press MEDIA to select e AM FM1 FM2 or CD e SATI SAT2 or SAT3 Satellite Radio mode e LINE IN auxiliary input jack In radio mode Press pd PP to access the next previous preset station In CD mode e Press kid Pe to listen to the next track on the disc In satellite radio mode e Press lt q P to advance through preset channels 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 101 Driver Controls In any mode e Press VOL or VOL to adjust the volume SYNC system hands free control features if equipped Press We briefly to use the voice command feature You will hear a tone and LISTENING will appear in the radio display Press and hold tt to exit voice command Press f to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press VOL or to adjust volume Press and hold to end a call or exit phone mode Press lt gt be to scroll through various menus and selections Press OK to confirm your selection For further information on the SYNC system refer to the SYNC supplement Navigation system SYNC hands free control features if equipped Press m control briefly until the voice i icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press f to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press VOL or to adjust volume Press and hold
126. Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest free finance options available Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportunity 411 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan IWAW 3 diz JLV1S ALIO ON LdV ssayqqv LNIdd SSV31d SINWN 66 8908r IN 20 eAoy e208 xog O d dS P4104 0 SIU ew pue mojaq UO EWJOJU BU 8 9 dWUOD aow uea oL idSJ P404 YUM PUIN JO 3983d BUINUAY Jag 412 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2010 F 150 f12 USA fus A Accessory delay cccccccecseeees 93 Advance Trac cccccccccessceseeneeees 279 Air cleaner filter 396 397 399 Air conditioning 59 62 64 67 manual heating and air conditioning system 05 59 Airbag supplemental restraint SYStEM onoonoae 185 186 193 196 and child safety seats 187 description 186 193 196 disposal ccccccceeeeeeeeseeeee 199 driver airbag 186 188 194 197 indicator light 192 195 198 operation 186 188 194 197 passenger airbag ce 186 188 194 197 side ALD AS siccin 193 Ambient mood lighting 78 Ambulance packages c008 6 AM FM scsesiisecsasciacdnbesd cheostesiasbede
127. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door 228 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If y
128. N is displayed The display will read ENTER OLD PIN Enter your current old PIN number and when the system accepts your entry it will display ENTER NEW PIN Enter your new four digit PIN and the system will save the new PIN and PIN SAVED will display c UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS Press OK when UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN Enter your four digit PIN and the system will unlock all channels and the display will read CHANNEL UNLOCKED d RESET PIN Press OK when RESET PIN is displayed The display will read ARE YOUR SURE Press OK again to automatically reset the PIN number to its initial password setting 1234 PIN RESET TO DEFAULT PIN will be displayed e RETURN Press OK when RETURN is displayed and the system will exit back to the satellite radio menu Sound Adjustments Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle through the following features BASS Press lt 4 SEEK P to adjust the level of bass TREBLE Press lt SEEK P to adjust the level of treble BALANCE Press lt SEEK P to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FADE Press lt SEEK P to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME With this feature on radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise The default setting is off 49 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Use lt S
129. NING An out of position front center occupant could affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance section of this Owner s Guide WARNING Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system Determining if the system is operational Af The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Airbag readiness in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required 192 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness lights will either OQ flash or stay lit O e The readiness lights will not UN illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Seat mounted side airbag system fe WARNING Do not place objects or m
130. ROID FOR ADDITIONAL LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI ERARON CONSULTER LE GUIDE LT225 75R 16 5E 200KPA 29PSI DU PROPRI TAIRE POUR DE PLUS PNEU DE SECOURS T145 80016 P225 60R17 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 420 KPA 60 PSI AMPLES 200 KPA 29 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 251 Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer 4 f 4 v fo GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Saf
131. RWD vehicles Four Wheel Drive 4WD All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram AEA YVAANAAA see eae Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires 234 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated check tire pressure and adjust to the recommended inflation pressure Note The TPMS reset tool is ONLY provided for vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after tire rotation only on these vehicles WARNING If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS tire pressure monitoring system then the settings for the TPMS sensors need to be updated Always perform the TPMS reset procedure after tire rotation If the system is not reset it may not provide a low tire pressure war
132. SA fus Driver Controls Tailgate step if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a feature that allows easier entry into the truck bed To open the tailgate step 1 Flip down the tailgate 2 Pull the yellow latch lever to the unlock positon ta to release the grab handle from its stowed postion and raise the handle upright until you feel it latch and see the latch lever in the lock positon a The yellow lever only needs to be used when releasing the grab handle 3 Rotate the center molding to unlatch the tailgate step and pull it towards you to extend it 4 Flip open the step panel to widen the step Note To reduce risk of falling e Operate step only when the vehicle is on level surface e Operate step only in areas with sufficient lighting e Always open flip panel to widen step e Always use grab handle when stepping up and down e Step not intended for bare footed use e Keep step clean from contamination before use e g snow mud e Keep the step load you load below 350 lb 159 kg e Never drive with step deployed To close the tailgate step 1 Close the step panel then lift and fully close the tailgate step into the tailgate 2 Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle then lower the handle 115 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Note e Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle e Never drive with
133. Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 375 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating
134. System provides the most benefit to belted occupants The system monitors and tailors the air bag deployment based upon safety belt usage Failure to properly wear your safety belt will increase your risk of injury Front safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments at the front outboard seating positions Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height pull on the center button and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts 179 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light
135. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 18 Message center 22 Entertainment Systems 40 AM FM stereo 40 AM FM stereo with CD MP3 42 Auxiliary input jack Line in 50 USB port 52 Satellite radio information 55 Navigation system 58 SYNC 58 Climate Controls 59 Manual heating and air conditioning 59 Dual electronic automatic temperature control 62 Navigation system based climate control 67 Rear window defroster 71 Lights 72 Headlamps 72 Turn signal control 76 Bulb replacement 78 Driver Controls 84 Windshield wiper washer control 84 Steering wheel adjustment 85 Power windows 91 Mirrors 93 Speed control 98 Tailgate 113 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Locks and Security 126 Keys 126 Locks 126 Anti theft system 138 Seating and Safety Restraints 147 Seating 147 Safety restraints 166 Airbags 185 Child restraints 199 Tires Wheels and Loading 223 Tire information 225 Tire inflation 228 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 241 Vehicle loading 249 Trailer towing 256 Trailer brake controller integrated 263 Recreational towing 269 Driving 271 Starting 271 Brakes 277 AdvanceTrac 279 Transmission operation 291 Reverse sensing system 297 Rear view camera system 299 Snowplowing 315 Roadside Emergencies 319 Getting roadside assistance 319 Hazard flasher control 320 Fuel pump shut off 321 Fuses and relays 321 Changing tires 330
136. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 1 in the Programming section 107 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Car2U Home Automation System if equipped The Car2U Home Automation System is a universal transmitter located in the driver s visor that O O O includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home The Car2U system s garage door opener function replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the interior of your vehicle After being programmed for garage doors the Car2U system transmitter can be programmed to operate security devices and home lighting systems WARNING Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Do not use the Car2U system with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Car2U system programming It is also
137. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection 64 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 3 S Manual override control Allows you to manually select where airflow is directed To return to full automatic control press AUTO When choosing to control airflow manually press repeatedly to toggle through the settings to choose e 2 Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents de mister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents floor vents rear seat floor vents and de mister vents e 2 Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents 4 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C 7 defrost and W floor defrost 5 AUTO Press to engage automatic temperature control Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 6 MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through
138. UdIN NIO O14LX uonevIyn ds pIo Jequinu j1ed pIo Teuondo 1Z 9ET suoyes 0 9 x0q 9 9 prepueys T786 motorodng yue pony suoy es 0 97 reuondo T2987 suoyes 0 9 x0q 9 9 prepuels T786 motorodng Yue pony suoy es 0 97 xoq g qeguredns f X0q 9 9 qeQ Boy suoy es 0 97 quel ang oyelyUIDUOD JoYseM PIPIUSPUM Toy sytenb Gg p P Joysem PTOTUSPUIM UMIMIBIG IJeIN10JO J oursus Trg CIreD ay sjrenb T EI 0899 pry CIP TD syrenb ZT queTeambea 402 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2010 F 150 f12 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications aseulep uorssrusueI osned ABU PIN J popuswUIUIOdDaI y uey 19470 pny Aue JO sSf TEAU IOIAIOS JO9IINON IYJ OUTULIOJOP 0 UOUYVWUALOfUL BDOUDUAJULDUL PAIN pPayos 0 JeJoy PNY AT eNOOUAW OSN Auo prnoys AT eNOOUMW embed Jey suorlsstwusues opyewo ny osuel Sulyelodo ewou syonsdp y uo uonempur ay Aq Jos oq pmoys pLa pny pue pmy uotssnusues JO JUNOWe 34L Setploedeo 191009 Arene s u Suyo QZIS SI J009 T W Js s SUT OOD pmyy uorssrusueaIg pue uonesndde apotyaa uo paseq AIA ILM sotyoedes yoI Tenjoe uragsAs Suooo pmy uotsstusuely Surpnpu Aoede py Arp yeunxorddy QORJANS TOA V UO Y OTYOA YPM JO4 ITTF ayy JO W0770q ay 0 SV T JSULIJ Y SUMY Aq pounutejep st Apoeded Jol IIM Sg IoyeM U pogIowqns Useq sey JXL Ival oy IWY AUB pasueyo oq pmoys juedLIqny AXL oy 1oJeM UI p SIowqns useq sey qu sse o Xe y IO p IMD I
139. accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessories com Exterior style Bug shields Chrome exhaust tips Deflectors Running boards Step bars Wheels Interior style Ambient lighting Electrochromatic compass temperature interior mirrors Power sliding rear window Floor mats Lifestyle Ash cup smoker s package Bedliners and bedmats 408 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories Bed side step Interior cargo organization and management Truck bed cargo organization and management Towing mirrors Trailer hitches wiring harnesses and accessories Pea
140. acking points Refer to Changing the tires in the Roadside Emergencies chapter BED EXTENDER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management feature in the truck bed Note This feature is not intended for off road usage To open the bed extender into tailgate mode 1 Pull the locking pin toward the center of the vehicle 117 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 2 Open the latches to release the panels 3 Rotate the panels toward the tailgate 4 Connect the two panels then rotate both knobs a quarter turn clockwise to secure the panels 118 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 5 Ensure the latch rod is inserted into the tailgate hole and the locking pins on both sides are engaged into y PEE their holes in the pick up box 6 Reverse steps for storage of the bed extender ee Ee Note When the vehicle is in motion ensure the locking pins and knobs are fully engaged Note Ensure all cargo is secured Note When the vehicle is in motion the tailgate load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg Note The bed extender should always be kept in the grocery mode or stowed position with the tailgate closed when not being used for the purpose of restraining cargo in the tailgate mode To open the bed extender into grocery mode follow Steps 1 4 by rotating the panels away from the tailgate
141. ad weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from those that existed when the gain was initially set The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the GAIN Misuse such as application during trailer sway could cause instability of trailer and or tow vehicle Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions The TBC does not provide anti lock control of the trailer wheels Trailer wheels can lockup on slippery surfaces resulting in reduced stability of trailer and tow vehicle The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle including ABS in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lockup Therefore if these systems are not functioning properly the TBC may not function at full performance When the vehicle is turned off the TBC Output is disabled and the display is shut down Reactivation of the ignition from off to on will awaken the TBC module The TBC is only a factory or dealer installed item Ford is not responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or customer installation Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the Workshop Manual Damage to the unit may result 266 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard ligh
142. ally return the vehicle to the previously set speed Increasing speed while using speed control There are two ways to set a higher speed e Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Up function Press and release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET control Reducing speed while using speed control There are two ways to reduce a set speed e Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Down function Press and release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h press the SET control 100 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and Turning off speed control There are two ways to turn off the speed control e Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal if equipped This will not erase your vehicle s previously set speed e Press the speed control OFF control Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased STEERING WHEE
143. am headlamps a ee Horn Interior demand lamps Mid box power feed Instrument panel cluster Key out inhibit solenoid Radio info display CID Radio buttons Key in chime 32 10A Non integrated compass module Heated only seat module 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits n Rating Trailer brake controller Electronic locking differential indicator 36 5A Passive anti theft system OF p e e 41 15A Auto dimming rear view mirror Door lock switch illumination 43 10A Heated mirror backlight relay Oa JO S e e 45 5A Front wiper logic Blower motor S Oa ee 46 7 5A Occupant classification sensor a ee 47 30A Circuit Power windows Moon roof P Meter pera dan aiae o 48 15A Delayed accessory relay Feeds OO A CO ee ee Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses 325 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery secti
144. and brake pedal e Press the right side of the control to adjust the pedals toward you aS Vv SSS e Press the left side of the control to adjust the pedals away from you WARNING Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS IF EQUIPPED Deployable running boards DRB automatically move when the doors are opened to assist entering and exiting the vehicle ZI A Automatic power deploy e The running boards will extend down and out when the doors are opened Automatic power stow e The running boards will return to the stowed position when the doors are closed There will be a two second delay before the running boards move in to the stowed position Manual power deploy To manually operate the running boards refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter e This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed OUT position for access to the roof e When running boards are manually set in the deployed position the boards will return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph 8 km h Enable disable To enable disable the power running board feature refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter e When this feature is disabled OFF the running boards will move to the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors 97
145. and hold the SELECT RESET stem for two seconds to set the language choice HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem when this message is displayed to get into to start the system check The message center will cycle through each of the systems being monitored For each of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message for two seconds Note Some systems show a message only if a condition is present 25 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 1 XXX OIL LIFE 2 CHARGING SYSTEM 3 DOOR STATUS 4 BRAKE SYSTEM 5 XX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL XXX 6 TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER if equipped and no trailer connected 7 TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT Gf equipped and trailer connected 8 MYKEY DISTANCE if programmed 9 MYKEY PROGRAMMED 10 ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you may need to take action on or be informed of e Some messages will appear once and then aga
146. ass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated 80 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Install the new bulb in reverse order Replacing front parking lamp turn signal sidemarker bulbs 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position and open the hood 2 Remove the pushpin that holds req the air deflector protective cover De A from the upper inboard corner of the lamp 3 Loosen the three retaining bolts two at top of lamp one at lower Zel inboard corner 4 Once the three retaining bolts ua have been removed slide the headlamp assembly forward disconnecting the two snap attachments at the fender 5 Remove the bulb and socket by turning it counterclockwise then pull it straight out 6 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing tail brake turn signal backup lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Open the tailgate to expose the lamp assembly and remove the two bolts from the tail lamp assembly 81 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 3 Carefully pull the lamp assembly straight rearward from the tailgate pillar to disengage two hidden snap in retainers Flare side tail lamps are not equipped with snap in retainers 4 Remove bulb socket from
147. at all the way back WARNING Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active airbag 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 209 Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Slide the tongue up the webbing 4 While holding both shoulder and lap portions next to the tongue route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure that the belt lt 4 webbing is not twisted 5 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 210 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 6 While pushing down with your knee on the child seat pull up on the shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap belt portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt 7 Allow the safety belt to retract and remove any slack in the belt to securely tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle 8 Attach the tether strap Cf the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 9 Before placing the child into the child seat forcibly pull the child seat forward and back to make sure that the seat is held securely in place To check this grab the seat at
148. ater alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle
149. ates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart 236 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law po 99 mph I eH OE PR 106 mph GT rh O Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with
150. ating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle Gncluding frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle WARNING Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury Children and airbags For additional important safety information read all information on safety restraints in this guide Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back WARNING Airbags can kill oy 187 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If two adults and a child occupy a Regu
151. ating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather select QY defrost Temperature and or fan speed can also be increased to improve clearing e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system off or with recirculated air engaged e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out e If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and idling for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C mode adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting and put the vehicle s transmission in P Park to continue to receive cool air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance MAX A C in AUTO 1 Press AUTO control 2 Set to desired temperature For maximum cooling performance MAX A C in manual override control 1 Choose W panel A C and MAX A C controls 2 Set the temperature to 60 F 16 C 3 Set the fan to the highest blower setting 70 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature
152. ation above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection What you should know about fail safe cooling if equipped If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The mini message center if equipped will indicate Check Gauges refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter 377 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e The tC light will illuminate If the engine reache
153. be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to e unlock the vehicle doors without a key e lock all the vehicle doors without a key e activate the personal alarm If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Two step door unlocking 1 Press and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps parking lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to unlock the passenger doors and the rear doors The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to the off position One step door unlocking If the one step door unlocking feature is activated press P and release once to unlock the passenger doors and the rear doors Note The parking lamps and interior lamps will illuminate refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this section if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position 131 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Switching from two step to one step door unlocking Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled Unlocking can be switched between t
154. belt pretensioner removes some slack from the safety belt system at the start of a crash The safety belt pretensioner uses the same crash sensor system as the front airbags and Safety Canopy system When the safety belt pretensioner deploys the lap and shoulder belt are tightened When the Safety Canopy system and or the front airbags are activated the safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger seating positions will be activated when the respective seatbelt is properly buckled WARNING The driver and the right front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags or Safety Canopy and safety belt pretensioners WARNING Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter 178 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belt usage sensors The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the safety belts are fastened The sensors provide information to the Personal Safety System which can then adapt the airbag deployment or safety belt pretensioner activation based upon safety belt usage WARNING The Personal Safety
155. by the decision but should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 349 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadia
156. by the following conditions e The 4WD control must be in either 4H 4X4 High or 4L 4X4 Low mode e The ELD will not engage if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 30 km h in 4X4 High or 56 mph 90 km h in 4X4 Low e In 4H 4X4 High the ELD will disengage at speeds above 25 mph 40 km h and will automatically reengage at speeds below 20 mph 30 km h e In 4L 4X4 Low the ELD will disengage at speeds above 62 mph 100 km h and will automatically reengage at speeds below 56 mph 90 km h The ELD is designed for off road use only and is not intended for use on dry pavement 306 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Activating the electronic locking differential ELD The ELD can be turned on by pulling the knob on the 4WD control toward you while the control is in either 4H 4X4 High or 4L 4X4 Low mode Once the knob is pulled the T light located on the control will blink for approximately two seconds and then it will remain solid The J indicator light will also display in the message center Once the iL light on the control remains solid and the E indicator light is displayed in the message center both rear wheel axle shafts will be locked together providing added traction If the T light blinks for 10 seconds then turns off and the Ae indicator light in the message center turns off one of the following has occurred e The vehicle speed is too high e The left and right rear wheel
157. c acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage 338 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 1 Connect
158. cations 370 399 recommendations cccce 370 refill capacities eee 400 Specifications serricornis 400 Event data recording 0 7 Exhaust fumes ressis 275 F Fail safe cooling 0 ce 377 Fleet MyKey programming 141 Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV 379 Fluid capacities 2 0 400 Fog IAMS sdcsscth secs secczsagsenstenciacehs 73 Four Wheel Drive vehicles 301 driving off road e eee 307 electronic shift 304 indicator light 0 0 301 lever operated shift 000 302 preparing to drive your vehicle sismeroryes iie hnar 286 VIC EEI E PEE EE A 379 calculating fuel eCONOMY orastensincaia 26 32 386 CAD arrire rnare aai aN iE 381 CAPACILY siseringi ona 400 choosing the right fuel 383 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates 0 389 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus detergent in fuel sessies 385 filler funnel c cceeeceeeeees 385 filling your vehicle with Pelsan 379 381 386 filter specifications 378 399 fuel pump shut off 000 321 improving fuel economy 386 octane rating 383 384 404 405 gual y ccoetecatcgestencetestreeesete cee 384 running out of fuel 338 385 safety information relating to automotive fuels ceee 379 Fuel flex fuel vehicle REVY sontecttueintccn 379 383 384 FUSES rerien kinasama 321 322 G Garage door opener s s 1
159. ce of mind Keyless entry keypad Locking gas plug for capless fuel system Remote start Vehicle security systems Wheel locks For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood e Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the own
160. ce the amount of smearing or override the feature by selecting low or high speed wiping or turning the wiper system off Note The rain sensing wiper feature must be turned off before entering a car wash 84 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick press and hold the gt P wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid a long press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers TILT STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED 1 Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you 2 Move the steering up or down until you find the desired location 3 Release the steering wheel release control Th
161. ce with flexible fuel vehicles procedures damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated 380 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others e Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle i
162. cept overdrive e O D OFF lamp is illuminated e Provides engine braking e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in and out of overdrive occurs hilly terrain heavy loads trailer towing and when engine braking is required e To return to O D Overdrive press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated 292 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 2 Second This position allows for second gear only e Provides engine braking e Use to start up on slippery roads e To return to D Overdrive move the gearshift lever into the D Overdrive position e Selecting 2 Second at higher speeds will cause the transmission to downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Overdrive or Drive e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear Driving with a 6 speed automatic transmission Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage while coasting or decelerating When you take
163. cities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried 388 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy e To maximize the fuel economy drive with the tonneau cover installed if equipped e Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal Four wheel drive operation if equipped is less fuel efficient than two wheel drive operation Close windows for high speed driving EPA fuel economy estimates Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates Contact your authori
164. cket behind the driver s seat SuperCab Attached to a floor bracket under OO e SuperCrew In a plastic box in the floor under the rear seat To remove the jack on Regular Cab and SuperCab models Remove the wing nut and turn the jack screw counterclockwise to release pressure before removing the jack from the bracket 332 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies To remove the jack on SuperCrew models 1 Lift both rear seat cushions 2 Remove the insert containing the Easy Fuel funnel from the driver s side 3 Remove the two small wing nuts on the passenger side 4 Slide the plastic box toward the driver s side and remove Removing the spare tire 1 Use the ignition key to remove the lock cylinder from the access hole of the bumper to allow access to the guide tube Assemble the jack handle as shown in the illustration 2 Fully insert the jack handle through the bumper hole and into the guide tube through the access hole in the rear bumper 3 Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground the tire can be slid rearward and the cable is slightly slack 4 Slide the retainer through the center of the wheel Tire change procedure WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block Gin both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of th
165. ctivate deactivate This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors 66 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH HEATED AND COOLED SEATS NAVIGATION BASED IF EQUIPPED CLIMATE O00 000 amp o Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 1 CLIMATE Press to control the climate control system through the touch display screen See Touchscreen functions later in this section 2 A O Rear defroster if equipped Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors the same button will activate both B Oy Heated mirrors if equipped Press to activate deactivate This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors 3 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C defrost and oA floor defrost 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 4 Passenger temperature Press to activate separate passenger temperature control to increase decrease the air temperature on the
166. d Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle If the transmission transfer case or front axle are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary 311 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant should be replaced After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction s
167. d front passenger seatbacks e A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Crash sensors located on the front doors e One crash sensor located on each side of the b pillar SuperCab only e One crash sensor located on each side of the c pillar SuperCrew only Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration 194 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guid
168. d steering 315 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Front wheel toe may require re adjustment to prevent premature uneven tire wear Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop Manual e Headlight aim may require re adjustment e The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on the vehicle s Safety Certification Label The maximum cold inflation pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the tire sidewall Tire air pressure may require re adjustment within these pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow installation Operating the vehicle with the snowplow attached Ford recommends that the F 150 be limited to low speed personal use snow removal Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has been driven at least 500 miles 800 km The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator and may cause the engine to run at a higher temperature Attention to engine temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are above freezing Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle provides the best performance Snowplowing with your airbag equipped vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger air bag Supplemental Restraint System SRS The SRS is designed to activate in certain frontal and offset frontal collis
169. damaged or the engine can overheat Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at operating temperature Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute The transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may overheat WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 55 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Engine temperature while plowing When driving with a plow your engine may run at a higher temperature than normal because the attached snowplow blade will restrict airflow to the radiator If you are driving more than 15 miles 24 km at temperatures above freezing angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide maximum airflow to the radiator If you are driving less than 15 miles 24 km at speeds up to 40 mph 64 km h in cold weather you will not need to worry about blade position to provide maximum airflow 317 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Factory installed snow plow prep package vehicles already have been programmed with the unique power train control strategy to provide proper cooling If the vehicle is being upgraded to the equivalent hardware set as the snow plow prep package then the vehicle can obtain the unique power train control strategy to provide proper cooling by getting service at an authorized dealer The powertrain control strategy required for snowplowing to provide proper cooling may increase fan noise that may also be not
170. dditional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter 221 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never o
171. de up into the CD slot For a CD6 system Press LOAD When the display reads SELECT SLOT choose the desired slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within five seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to six discs Press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the disc in preset 1 will begin to play Press the number preset buttons 1 6 to choose the disc you want to play gt 11 Play Pause Press to play pause a track when playing a M CD SY A Eject For a single CD system press A to eject the CD For a CD6 system press A and select the desired CD slot by pressing the corresponding memory preset number The display will read EJECTING When the system has ejected the CD the display will read REMOVE CD Remove the CD If you do not remove the CD the system will reload the disc To auto eject all loaded discs Press and hold The system will eject all discs and prompt you when to remove them SEEK Press 4 SEEK P to access the previous next track CAT Category FOLD Folder In MP3 mode only Press CAT FOLD and then press lt SEEK P to access the
172. designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover events not in rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood WARNING Several Safety Canopy system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the Safety Canopy system has deployed the Safety Canopy will not function again unless replaced The Safety Canopy system including the A B C and D pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the Safety Canopy is not replaced it will not function again which will increase the risk of injury in a future collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Airbag readiness in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the side airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same
173. ding o on 249 Ventilating your vehicle 275 WwW Warning lights see Lights 12 Washer fluid wove 367 Water Driving through 314 Windows POWE a ccpicnceei iiasddascemenstiadasderiaats 91 Windshield washer fluid and WIAD EE E E 84 checking and adding fluid 367 replacing wiper blades 368 419
174. dition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it 225 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1
175. e than five seconds Button pressed again after Not illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled deactivation Trailer sway control Your vehicle may be equipped with trailer sway control When properly equipped trailer sway control will use the vehicle s AdvanceTrac with RSC system to detect and help reduce trailer sway by applying brake force at individual wheels and if necessary by reducing engine power WARNING Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from swaying it mitigates the sway from increasing once it has occurred If you are experiencing trailer sway it is likely that the trailer is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed of the vehicle and trailer is too high Pull the vehicle trailer over to a safe location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load and reduce speed to a safe level while towing If trailer sway is experienced SLOW DOWN During trailer sway control events the sliding car igi icon in the instrument cluster will flash momentarily The message center will also display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED In some cases when trailer sway is detected the vehicle speed is too high and may be above a speed at which trailer sway will not grow continuously This may cause the system to activate multiple times causing a gradual reduction in speed Note The trailer sway control will only activate at speeds greater than 40 mph 64 km h 284 2010 F 150 f12 Owners G
176. e 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Several airbag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Airbag readiness in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the side airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision 195 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Safety Canopy System 4 WARNING Do not place objects or mou
177. e the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity Chow much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 250 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Example only CARGO Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE me st oome See OWNERS FRONT 200 KPA 29PS MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29PSI ADDITIONAL SPARE 7145 80D16 420 KPA 60PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOAD INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET A LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL yy FRONT yy REAR y NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL AVANT ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer XXX Ibs XXX XX XXXX XXXX SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE see owners MANUAL Ea PRESSION A F
178. e center information in the Instrument cluster chapter Autounlock feature The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is in the on position all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the off or accessory position and e the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being transitioned to the off or accessory position Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened 128 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Deactivating activating autounlock feature Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock sequence e using a keypad procedure if equipped or e or by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument ClusterDriver Controls chapter Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeat
179. e designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more common moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints SRS section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants
180. e fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations ran e On the instrument panel e Inside the center console storage area if equipped e On the rear of the center console if equipped accessible from the rear seat Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running 90 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Cupholder Ashtray if equipped The cupholder ashtray is located on the instrument panel
181. e is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box is marked on the computer module and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create your own 5 digit personal entry code When pressing the controls on the keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation Anti scan feature The keyless entry keypad is equipped with an anti theft function called antiscan The antiscan feature provides a one minute lockout feature where the user is unable to enter the vehicle using the keypad this lockout occurs when a valid entry code has not been entered by the user within seven attempts 35 consecutive button presses During the lockout the keypad will flash and pressing the controls on the keypad will be ignored except for pressing the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 controls simultaneously which will still lock the vehicle The anti scan feature will be turned off after e one minute when the anti scan feature times out e one minute of keypad inactivity 136 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e the control is pressed on the remote entry transmitter e the ignition is turned from the off position to the on position or from the on position to the off position Programming a personal entry code To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code keypad will illuminate when pressed 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad
182. e lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Function Number of Trade number bulbs H13 9008 2 Front park turn lamps 2 3157NA natural amber 2 4057K 3057K Backup lamp styleside Backup lamp flareside Backup lamp Harley Exterior mounted mirror turn See your dealer signal indicator if equipped ee 2 To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer Rear stop turn sidemarker tail lamp flareside Rear stop turn sidemarker tail lamp styleside Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently Replacing headlamp bulbs 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position and open the hood 79 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 2 Remove the pushpin that holds the air deflector protective cover from the upper inboard corner of the lamp 3 Loosen the three retaining bolts two at top of lamp one at lower inboard corner 4 Once the three retaining bolts have been removed slide the headlamp assembly forward disconnecting the two snap attachments at the fender 5 Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward 6 Remove the bulb and socket by turning it counterclockwise then pull it straight out WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the gl
183. e line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number 406 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO win DATE GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Label The following table tells you FRONT GAWR XXXXL REARGAMR XXXL which transmission each code XXXXKG H XXXXKG WITH represents OC 5 sS a is AT XXX KPa XX PS COL AT XXX KPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR TIPPS TR TAXLE SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX X XX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XN XXXX XXXXXXX XX Four speed automatic 4R75E OoOo Q O Six speed automatic 6R80 Ooo 6 407 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each
184. e minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables 341 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 342 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 343 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure On 4x2 vehicl
185. e stem on the right front tire Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds 247 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 8 Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds 9 Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained driver s side rear tire the TPMS tell tale stops flashing and the message center if equipped displays TRAINING COMPLETE 10 Turn the ignition off If two short horn beeps are heard the reset procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the ignition is turned to off seek assistance from your authorized dealer 11 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door See Vehicle Loading in this chapter for more information SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and dea
186. e the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in this section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Gate Operator amp Canadian Programming During programming your hand held transmitter may AT automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After completing Step 1 outlined in the Programming section replace Step 2 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overheating e Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note Step 2 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until t
187. e vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured 333 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Refer to the instruction sheet located with the jack for detailed tire change instructions 1 Block the diagonally opposite wheel Q a TS 2 Obtain the spare tire and jack from their storage locations Note Te g F 150 SVT Raptor also includes a chock saddle extension and wing bolt 3 Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim that is blocking the lug nuts 4 Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground Note For F 150 SVT Raptor install the saddle extension on the jack as shown in the jack usage and storage instructions 5 Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground WARNING When one of the rear wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the tran
188. e way up approximately 90 degrees Once both handles are raised the lid may be closed Note Windows in the lid will allow the handles to stick up above the lid with the lid closed After closing the lid simply lift up and inboard away from the pickup box side to release bin from rail To install reverse the above instructions Note Remove the bins during severe off road driving to avoid damage to the cargo bins and pickup box WARNING If any levers are visible above the lid of the bin the bin is not securely attached to the rail and may become detached from the vehicle if driven in that configuration 125 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle In case of loss replacement keys are available from your dealer You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency Refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section in this chapter for more information POWER DOOR LOCKS IF EQUIPPED Press control to unlock all doors Press control to lock all doors ie all Smart unlocking feature The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out of your vehicle With the key in any ignition position e The driver s door will automatically unlock if it is locked by the driver s power lock control while the driver s door is open The vehicle
189. eaking and smearing Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components 367 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle 2 from the wiper arm Press the lock tab to release the blade and pull the B55 wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
190. earning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol content for flexible fuel vehicles e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned e For flexible fuel vehicles if you are operating on E85 you may experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been relearned 372 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected e Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized Y A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 86 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant shou
191. eated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate The front passenger sensing system will disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated the passenger side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries 189 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off or PASS AIRBAG pass airbag off indicator which will Be illuminate and stay lit to remind you Plo that the front passenger frontal OFF airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel just above the radio Note The indicator lamp will illumi
192. eavy objects 4L 4X4 Low will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph 5 km h this is normal and should be no reason for concern Refer to Shifting to from 4L 4X4 Low for proper operation Shifting between 2H 4X2 and 4H 4X4 High Move the 4WD control between 2H 4X2 and 4H 4X4 High at any forward speed The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS during the system shift 4X4 HIGH will display in the message center if 4H is selected and 4X2 will momentarily display in the message center if 2H is selected Note Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while preforming a shift will improve engagement disengagement times Note Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping Note Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages this is normal Note 4X4 High mode is not intended for use on dry pavement Shifting to from 4L 4X4 Low 1 Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less 2 Place the transmission in N Neutral 3 Move the 4WD control to the desired position The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS during the shift The message center will then display the system mode selected If any of the above shift conditions are not met the shift will not occur and the message center will display information guiding the driver through the proper shifting procedures 304 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driv
193. ecsicsaczsveesdencdpsaiceesetiaseess see 263 BUDI ean E EE 78 C Capacities for refilling fluids 400 Car2U Home Automation SYSLER arrean 108 Cargo management system 120 CD soarana RT 42 Cell phone USE ou eeccessceeeeteeees 8 Changing a tire seisnes 330 413 Index Child safety seats occ 204 Ford Extended Service attaching with tether straps 214 E ee 410 in front seat wo eee 205 211 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada sennior 350 Wi TEAL SCAU odeur 205 211 f LATO aanname atau 2123 Getting Toadside assistance 314 recommendations c008 202 Getting the service you TELTE E EE A A 346 Child safety seats booster Ordering additional owner s SOAUS EEE AA A A A 219 literat re earen aii 351 Cleaning your vehicle Utilizing the engine compartment 355 Mediation Arbitration instrument panel 357 358 Programi 3 cesses sesneepe ee daseaveieeessees 350 MNGETION 2505 czsn ceceteecctsceveceasecse 4 359 plastig DATES sexcdietorsAnactestenes 356 D safety Delts siscesisscceageevees seers 359 f washing eseese 353 Daytime running lamps WAX NE oisinn 354 see Lamps ser ccrtisamseeihecniacencetess 74 wheels 5s isda cavenvs dangadsvecvesuanted vets 354 Defrost wiper blades wee eeeeeeeeeee eee 356 rear window and rearview Climate control TONS oee cessssvicsencsesesaress 62 64 67 see Air conditioning or windshield 0 eee 62 64 67 Heating sss
194. ect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 241 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the tire wheel cavity The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem The pressure sensor is covered by the tire a
195. ed If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 129 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8 While still holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 8a second time 5 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Message center procedure For information on activating
196. ed level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous volume The RSS may have reduced performance or an increased chance of false detection if the tailgate is not locked and in the upright position If the tailgate is down the RSS tone may be heard intermittently or continuously The tone may also be heard if items in the truck bed protrude rearward outside the bed The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on A control in the message center allows the driver to disable the system refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms 298 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The rearview camera system located on the tailgate provides a video image which appears in the rearview mirror or the navigation T system i
197. eed turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible If the warning stays on or comes on when the engine is operating at normal speeds contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter CHECK FUEL FILL INLET Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Refer to Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter SERVICE ADVANCETRAC Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK 4X4 if equipped Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is present For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as
198. egory MEMORY PRESETS 0 9 There ay27s 4 s el71e1 10 are 30 available presets 10 each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a memory preset number 0 9 until sound returns TEXT Press and release to display the artist and song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the Artist AR Song SO Channel CH and Category CA In TEXT MODE Sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the indicator is active press TEXT and then press lt SEEK P to view the additional display text CAT Category FOLD Folder Press to toggle between turning the most recently selected satellite radio category on or off The category icon CAT will illuminate in the display when a specific category is selected the icon will not illuminate during CATEGORY ALL If no category has ever been selected NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display Note Separate categories can be set for SAT1 SAT2 or SATS Refer to Satellite radio menu for further information on selecting a satellite radio category SATELLITE RADIO MENU Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press W A to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press W A to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press O
199. el rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage 314 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes SNOWPLOWING For F 150 snowplow applications Ford recommends the F 150 4x4 Regular Cab and SuperCab equipped with the 5 4L engine Heavy Duty Payload Package and Snow Plow Prep Package The Heavy Duty Payload Package for 4x4 includes unique powertrain control strategy required for engine cooling when the raised snowplow blade blocks radiator airflow in highway driving Factory installed snow plow prep package vehicles already have been programmed with the unique power train control strategy to provide proper cooling If the vehicle is being upgraded to the equivalent hardware set as the snow plow prep package then the vehicle can obtain the unique power train control strategy to provide proper cooling by getting service at an authorized dealer The powertrain control strategy required for snowplowing t
200. eleased have your brake system serviced immediately Parking brake To set the parking brake 1 press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated until the parking brake is released B RAKE To release pull the lever 2 278 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park automatic transmission or in 1 First manual transmission ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL RSC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and or wheel tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember t
201. elt into the pocket found on the inside lid of the storage compartment 3 Fold the center buckle into the storage compartment 4 Close the lid Before a passenger sits in the front center seat make sure the lap belt and buckle are both placed in their in use position and no longer stowed Always fasten your seat belt when riding in the front center seat 175 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Energy management retractors Your vehicle has a safety belt system equipped with energy management retractors at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions An energy management retractor is a device which pays out webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help further reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant Safety belt systems equipped with an energy management retractor must be replaced if they were in use during a frontal collision which resulted in deployment of the frontal airbags Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter The front and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The front passenger outboard and rear outboard seat safety belts have two types of locking modes described below Vehicle sensitive mode The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode allowing free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movem
202. ely 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 30 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 393 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick if and the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C Co SERRE Hor HEHH 2o nor app Correct fluid level The transmission fluid sho
203. em and the optional setting is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information HILL DESCENT CONTROL FAULT if equipped Displayed when a hill descent system fault is present HILL CNTRL OFF SYSTEM COOLING if equipped Displayed when a hill descent system fault is present FOR OFF ROAD SLOW TO 5 MPH if equipped Displayed when the vehicle speed requirement for off road mode entry has not been met OFF ROAD MODE ENABLED if equipped Displayed when off road mode becomes active EXITING OFF ROAD MODE if equipped Displayed when off road mode becomes inactive HILL DESCENT CONTROL ACTIVE if equipped Displayed when hill descent control mode becomes active HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF if equipped Displayed when hill descent control mode becomes inactive FOR HILL CNTRL 20 MPH OR LESS if equipped Displayed when the vehicle speed requirement for hill control mode entry has not been met DRIVER RESUME CONTROL if equipped Displayed when the hill control and off road mode require the driver to resume control FOR HILL CNTRL SELECT GEAR if equipped Displayed when the driver is requested to select a transmission gear to enable operation of the hill mode and off road mode COAST DOWN MODE if equipped Displayed when vehicle enters coast down mode 39 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS Note
204. emely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied 161 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment A position 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust release button and A the unlock remove button then pull up on the head restraint a ye To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks 4 F Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position 162 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly Folding up the rear seats SuperCab only The rear seat has a split 60 40 cushion Each seat cushion can be flipped up into a vertical storage position 1 Pull control to release seat cushion 2 Ro
205. ency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper 268 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e causing internal damage to the components e affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational RV towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
206. ener is a fixed code device If not your garage door opener is a rolling code device Rolling code programming Note Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves time sensitive actions Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so you will know which actions are time sensitive If you do not follow the time sensitive actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter NS 1 Firmly press the two outer Car2U system buttons for 1 2 seconds then release 109 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 2 Go to the garage to locate the garage door opener motor and its learn button You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the unit s cover or light lens to locate the learn button Press the learn button after which you will have 10 30 seconds to return to your vehicle and complete the following steps If you cannot locate the learn button refer to the Owner s Guide of your garage door opener or call the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 3 Return to your vehicle Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the O O O garage door You may need to hold the b
207. ent For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers The front outboard safety belts can also be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt Rear safety belts Gf equipped can also be made to lock up by pulling quickly on the belt Automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt or the Regular Cab center safety belt When to use the automatic locking mode e Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a front outboard passenger seating position in a Regular Cab SuperCab SuperCrew or any rear seating position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew The Regular Cab front center seatbelt has a cinch mechanism Refer to Safety belt with cinch tongue Regular Cab center only earlier in this chapter Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seat whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter 176 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How to use the automatic locking mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e
208. entry from the vehicle Press the RESET button to turn the easy entry exit seat on or off REAR PARK AID if equipped This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected Press the RESET button to turn the rear park assist on or off TRAILER SWAY if equipped This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway Press the RESET button to turn trailer sway on or off CREATE MYKEY MYKEY SETUP CLEAR MYKEY For more information refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter LANGUAGE ENGLISH SPANISH FRENCH Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in Selectable languages are English Spanish or French 34 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message center through each of the language choices Press the RESET button to set the language choice System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly t
209. ents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trawler towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty
210. equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles
211. er shoulder and chest and seatback upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 lb 86 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 201 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X LATCH LATCH lower lower Restraint Child anchors anchors Type Weight Rear facing child seat Forward facing child seat WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained
212. er and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months perform the following 1 Press and release the SELECT RESET stem to display OIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET NEW 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem for two seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100 Note To change oil life 100 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months to another value proceed to Step 3 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press the SELECT RESET stem to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 10 UNITS Displays the current units English or Metric Press the SELECT RESET stem to change from English to Metric AUTOLAMP SEC This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off Press the SELECT RESET stem to select the new autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds AUTOLOCK This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion Press the SELECT RESET stem to turn autolock on or off AUTOUNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off 24 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide
213. er may adversely affect battery performance and durability 409 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask you dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If
214. er the internet using any computer connected to the internet U S customers only For information on extended subscription terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in Satellite Radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously 56 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required This than two seconds to message should disappear produce audio for shortly the selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does not system failure clear within a short period present of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your preset
215. er the right hand side of the instrument panel To remove the trim panel for access to the fuse box pull the panel toward you and swing it out away from the side and remove it To reinstall it line up the tabs with the grooves on the panel then push it shut To remove the fuse box cover press in the tabs on both sides of the cover then pull the cover off 322 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies To reinstall the fuse box cover place the top part of the cover on the fuse panel then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click shut Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly wf fol a l n Y if fro fro c gt on B meee gg 5 aj f gt N s Je es on Ke co no NI g foot Jel foo fo B ed 9 KA i 7 5 o Ce 20 Cs Cie al 5 C27 C28 9 The fuses are coded as follows i Rating pT 30A fMoonrooft O o ho PBT SA Not used spare Pp AT BOA Not used spare 10A Keypad illumination Brake Shift microprocessor power Po 20A Tum signals Stop lamps 8 10 how beam headlamps right 323 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating a ae ee ee lamps Backlighting Puddle lamps GPS module 12 7 5A Power mirror switch Memory seat module microprocessor power Steering column switch PTA High be
216. er to the Navigation System supplement for further information SYNC IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC a hands free communications and entertainment system with special phone and media features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC section in the Navigation System supplement if equipped 58 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls SINGLE ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL 2 ee 2 p Ty a E d aw MAX AIC 6 1 G7 Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and de mister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection 2 A G Rear defroster if equipped Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors the same button will activate both 2 B OH Heated mirrors if equipped Press to activate deactivate This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors 3 Multifunction control Press repeatedly to toggle through the settings to choose e 2 Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents de mister vents floor vents and rear seat floor ven
217. er using a load equalizing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and all doors closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 1 2 inch 13 mm of the reference point After proper adjustment the rear bumper should be no higher than in Step 2 WARNING Do not adjust a weight distributing hitch to any position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was before attaching the trailer Doing so will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch which may cause unpredictable handling and could result in serious personal injury Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper 262 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjus
218. eration and the column will respond to manual adjustment of the control WARNING Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle is moving 86 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls On vehicles with memory feature to prevent damage to the steering column the steering column is designed to set a stopping position just short of the end of the column position If the steering column encounters an object while moving up or down a new stopping position will be set To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position e After encountering the new stopping position press the steering column control again to override e Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the column position e A new soft stop will be automatically set The next time the steering column is tilted it will stop just short of the end of the column position ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp Slide on rod feature The visor will slide back and forth on the rod for increased sunlight coverage Rotate the visor towards the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner visor must be retracted before moving it back towards the windshield 87 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CENTER CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The center
219. ers Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces RUNNING OUT OF FUEL If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable fuel container see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system as it can be damaged You must use the included funnel in such circumstances WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank all of which could result in serious personal injury JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuri
220. es it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground without dollies and the rear wheels off the ground On 4x4 vehicles it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur 344 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral If you cannot move the gear shift lever refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for instructions e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 345 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure
221. etting is programmed through the remote transmitter upon unlocking the door via remote entry system the seat position will travel to the desired memory setting less 2 inches 5 cm Once entering the vehicle and inserting the key in the ignition while in P Park the easy entry feature will move the seat an additional 2 inches 5 cm to the desired memory location See Locks and Security for activating the memory seat feature through the remote entry system Deactivating activating the easy access easy out feature The easy entry exit feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle message center if equipped If your vehicle does not have a message center the feature can be turned off or on through the following process 1 Put the key into the ignition The driver seat may move forward if the easy entry exit feature is activated 2 Place the ignition key into the on position do not start the vehicle When the vehicle is in the on position the interior and exterior lights the climate controls and the radio are functional without the engine started See Programming remote transmitters for ignition switch diagram 3 Turn the ignition key to the off position 4 Cycle the ignition key between the off position and the on position a total of three times ending with the ignition in the off position 5 Engage the forward or rearward seat switch 6 Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch The driver seat may move rear
222. ety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 252 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus e Example only WARNING Tires Wheels and Loading MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG DATE XX XX XXXXL FRONT GAWR XXXXL XXXXKG XXXX XXXXXXX XXXX XX RIMS gt AT XXX KkPaXX PSLCOLD 4f ATOXXX kPa XX THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MO VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR IPPS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XAXXXXXXXXXXX XIX XXXX XXXXXXX XX WITH TIRES RIMS PSI COLD OR TIRES XXXXX MFD BYE FORD MC MOTOR 0 GYW XXX LBAXXXKG FRONT unr N7 REN GAWR PHBE AR XXXX 7 WITH AVEC T RES PNEUS IOAK XXXXX amp DATE xx xx XXXX XXXXXX RIMS JANTES XXxXXX AT A kPa PSI LPC 200 xx VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE 0000X COMPLIES 0009 300 00 33000 jumped COLD A FROID xxx xx JUMELEES INTIR TIPPS TR AMIE T SPR X XX O OOODUUODIKX XXX VXXXX00000X XX Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury
223. ety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat if the lower anchors are not used For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this chapter for more information 212 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the following seating positions LATCH is not available on F150 Regular cab 8 J o e F150 SuperCab and SuperCrew The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seatback Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments h Follow the instructions later in this chapter on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown gt WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death WARNING Depending on where you secure a child res
224. ever drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable two way radios 8 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your
225. f equipped of the area behind the vehicle It adds ee CD o assistance to the driver while S reversing or reverse parking the vehicle To use the camera system place the transmission in R Reverse an image will display on the left portion of the rearview mirror or on the navigation screen if equipped The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and or road condition e 1 Rear bumper e 2 Red zone ew e 3 Yellow zone hi NB e 4 Green zone 3 e 5 Centerline of vehicle lz Always use caution while backing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle Image delay if displayed through the rearview mirror When shifting out of R Reverse and into any other gear the image in the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off to assist in parking or trailer hookup Image delay if displayed through the Navigation screen After shifting out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the image in the navigation screen will remain until the vehicle speed reaches five mph 8 km h only if the rear camera delay feature is on or until any navigation radio button is pressed 299 2
226. firmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press W A to select either RETURN or CANCEL c DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all song s from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED d DISABLE ALERTS ENABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off 48 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e CHANNEL LOCKOUT MENU Press OK to enter the Channel Lockout menu Press the W A to scroll through the following options a LOCK UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL Press OK when LOCK UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN Enter your four digit PIN number initial PIN is 1234 and the system will lock unlock the channel and CHANNEL LOCKED or UNLOCKED will be displayed Note you must be tuned to the specific channel you want to lock unlock when using this feature b CHANGE PIN Press OK when CHANGE PI
227. from entering the vehicle Press the MAX A C button again for normal A C operation 7 Temperature control Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 8 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle 9 Q Power Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the GV defrost or WA floor defrost position Temperature and or fan speed can also be increased to improve clearing e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system off or with recirculated air engaged e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield 60 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and idling for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the P Park position to continue
228. fter inputting switch settings simultaneously press and release all three Car2U system buttons The indicator lights will turn on 5 Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the garage door O O O Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves During this time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Do not release the button until you see the garage door move Most garage doors open quickly You may need to hold the button from 5 55 seconds before observing movement of the garage door 6 The indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete If your garage door opener does not operate following these steps repeat Steps 2 through 6 Otherwise call the toll free Car2U help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons Note The system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it will be necessary to erase the current settings using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices being used 112 2010
229. fumes from entering the vehicle Refer to the Climate controls chapter for more information 2WD vehicles Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted 4WD vehicles equipped with manual shift transfer case e Release the parking brake e Turn the key in the ignition to the off position e Place the transmission in N Neutral e Place the transfer case lever in N Neutral e The maximum recommended distance is unlimited e The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no damage is done to the internal transfer case components The transfer case N Neutral position overrides the transmission and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift lever position The vehicle can move forward or backward This position should only be used when towing the vehicle WARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle After reaching the destination you must place your vehicle s 4x4 gearshift lever in gear 2H 4H or 4L 269 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled
230. g Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid HH 8 BD LH Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter Dp pete Compartment a e Tack lt o Check Fuel Cap pS hn EE 1 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 11 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Standard instrument cluster 12 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Harley Davidson instrument cluster LY AL che Zu NG ZF cE an Om 4 WOOD A 22 DO Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information Note Some warning lights are reconfigurable telltale RTT indicator lights and will illuminate in Or the message center These lights D D mi t function the same as the other warning lights Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the
231. gaged Li acy Driver cooled seat if equipped Press to control the driver cooled seat Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 12 4 Driver heated seat if equipped Press to control the driver heated seat Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 13 O Power Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off 14 C7 Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and de mister vents Can be used to clear the windshield 68 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls of fog and thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS CLIMATE Driver Gy fe Passenger oor We BE cor LA JL eI ICA Temperature Fan Speed Temperature CV Jos JL JCV_ ws f Max AC g DUAL a Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Temperature Press the up and down arrows on the left side of the screen to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the driver side of the vehicle This control
232. ge Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed 378 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS fg Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before fueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visib
233. gement retractors and safety belt usage sensors e Driver s seat position sensor e Front crash severity sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger Airbag Off indicator light e Restraints Control Module RCM with impact and safing sensors e Restraint system warning light and back up tone e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor and indicator lights 166 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant classification and conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module RCM During a crash the RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either none one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags ar
234. ght trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m with don t Set the example teen deaths occur 4 wear belts times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see 182 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given Consider T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown clear Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s air bag system Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Minder are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding
235. gramming the remote transmitters turn the ignition to the 1 off position or wait 20 seconds Again the doors will lock unlock to confirm programming has been completed llluminated entry The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door s or sound the personal alarm or when the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code are correctly entered into the keyless keypad The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if e the ignition switch is turned to the on position or e the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or 135 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e after 25 seconds of illumination The dome lamp control if equipped must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry system to operate The lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the last door is closed even if the dimmer control is on SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED You can use the keyless entry keypad to e lock all vehicle doors e unlock only the driver s door e unlock all vehicle doors e program erase the customer keycode e enable disable the autolocking feature The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this cod
236. h to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate 73 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output In order for the DRLs to function e the ignition must be in the on position and e the headlamp control is in the O parking lamp or autolamp position WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel when exterior sonal oe lights are on e Rotate the thumbwheel from left to right to brighten the instrument panel e Rotate the thumbwheel from right to left to dim the instrument panel e Rotate fully to the right past detent to turn on interior lamps e Rotate to the left position past detent to turn off the interior lamps and to disable the illuminated entry feature When the control is in the far left position it acts as a dome lamp defeat override Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full do
237. hat even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac with RSC system activates SLOW DOWN 279 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the sliding car icon igi will iluminate steadily Verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled push the AdvanceTrac with RSC control button located on the center of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac with RSC disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability enhancement features for certain driving
238. he Driving chapter for more information 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS Displayed when the 4X4 system is making a shift For further information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH if equipped Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD if equipped May display when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter TRAILER CONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a correct trailer connection a trailer with electric trailer brakes is sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE
239. he frequency 106 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls signal has been accepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal e Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button 4 Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate 6 C operator security system entry door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the l hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink buttons To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot Ar be erased e Press and hold the two outer O HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds V HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2
240. he ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 6 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition 7 After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition 8 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least six seconds 9 Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition If successful the new coded key s will start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out 140 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security If not successful the new coded key s will not start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1 through 5 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new spare key s programmed Note To program MyKey features refer to MyKey in this chapter MYKEY The MyKey feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated as a MyKey The key will rema
241. he old bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 4 Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise 83 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Rain sensing wipers if equipped The rain sensing wipers will automatically activate when moisture is present on the windshield and the multi function switch is set to one of five auto interval moisture sensitivity settings Rotate the end of the control toward the windshield to increase the sensitivity The speed of the rain sensitive wipers will vary based on the amount of moisture detected on the windshield and the auto interval setting There are no interval intermittent wipe settings on vehicles with rain sensing wipers The wipers will continue to wipe as long as the presence of moisture is detected on the windshield More or less wiping may occur depending on humidity mist or light rain or road spray Keep the outside of the windshield clean especially the area around the rear view mirror where the sensor is located or rain sensor performance may be affected Note During winter driving conditions with ice snow or a salty road mist inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing may occur In these conditions you can lower the sensitivity to redu
242. hrough the other settings medium heat two indicator lights low heat one indicator light or off O00 a Cooled seats The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the cooled seats Press once to activate the high cool setting three indicator lights Continue pressing to scroll through the other settings medium cool two indicator lights low cool one indicator light or off If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on the feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated ef 100 158 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Climate controlled seats air filter replacement if equipped The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be replaced periodically Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for more information e There is a filter located under the rear of each front seat e The filter can be accessed from the second row seat Move the front seats all the way forward and up to ease access To remove an air filter 1 Remove key from ignition 2 Push up on the outside rigid edge of the filter and rotate toward the front of the vehicle once tabs are released Figg EF YAS 3 Remove filter 159 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To install a filter e First position the fil
243. ice or deep sand The message center will display 4X4 High when this mode is selected Shifting between 2H 4X2 and AWD Auto or 4H High Move the control from the 2H position to the AWD or 4H position at a stop or while driving at any forward speed The message center may display 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS during the system shift The message center will then display AWD if AWD has been selected or 4X4 High if 4H is selected The message center will momentarily display 4X2 if 2H has been selected Note 4X4 High mode is not intended for use on dry pavement 305 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Shifting between AWD Auto and 4H High Move the control from AWD to 4H at a stop or while driving at any speed The message center will display AWD if AWD has been selected and 4X4 High if 4H has been selected Note 4X4 High mode is not intended for use on dry pavement Electronic locking differential ELD if equipped The electronic locking differential ELD is a device housed in the rear axle which allows both rear wheels to turn at the same speed The ELD can provide additional traction should the vehicle become stuck The ELD is electronically activated by the driver and can be shifted on the fly It is intended for use in mud rocks sand or any off road condition where maximum traction is needed It is not intended for use on dry pavement The ELD is affected
244. iced under conditions other than snow plowing 318 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 km from the d
245. iees 42 Antifreeze see Engine coolant 373 Anti lock brake system see Brakes eee 277 278 Anti theft system 138 arming the system 006 139 ATIMIPESTS 253ss2dscedscnetastgeceshadesectais 151 Audio system see Radio 40 42 Automatic transmission driving an automatic OVETONIVE axcssitticsisaceeees 291 293 fluid adding 0 393 395 fluid checking 0 393 395 fluid refill capacities 400 fluid specification 0 0 400 Auxiliary input jack Line in 50 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index Axle lubricant specifications 400 refill capacities 00000000000000 400 B Battery imene ane E 371 acid treating emergencies 371 jumping a disabled battery 338 maintenance free ee 371 replacement specifications 3899 SOTVICING siscsacsasssazesassnssontnadecvard 371 Bed extender cc cccccceeeceees 117 Belt Minder eseese 180 deactivating activating the Belt Minder 183 Booster seats 00cccccceeeeeeees 219 BYAKES apcron 277 antilokk sscccsyessustorctns essdacs 277 278 anti lock brake system ABS warning light eee 278 fluid checking and adding 393 fluid refill capacities 400 fluid specifications 400 lubricant specifications 400 ATKINS serieei kesis 278 shift interlock 0 287 289 PPAU CT s
246. ill come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on AM FM Press repeatedly to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band TUNE Turn the knob to go o gt up down the frequency band in N individual increments SV DIRECT Press DIRECT and then manually enter the desired radio station i e 93 9 using the memory preset numbers 0 9 43 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems SEEK Press lt SEEKP to access the previous next strong radio station SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all strong radio stations 0 9 MEMORY PRESETS When a 2 7s s e 7 1e1 2 0 tuned to any station press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 30 stations 10 in AM 10 in FM1 and FM2 Saving presets automatically Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 To activate the autoset feature Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO PRESET ON OFF appears in the display Use lt SEEK P to toggle AUTO PRESET to ON and either wait five seconds for the search to initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search If you press another control within those five seconds the search will not initiate The 10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are
247. imilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 330 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size d
248. in restricted until MyKey is disabled Any remaining keys are referred to as an Administrator key or Admin key The Admin key can be used to create a MyKey program optional MyKey settings and disable the MyKey feature When the MyKey feature is enabled the user can use System Check in the message center to see how many MyKeys and Admin keys are programmed to the vehicle and how many total miles have been driven with the MyKey active MyKey Restricted Features Standard settings These settings cannot be changed The audio system will be muted whenever Belt Minder is activated until the safety belts are buckled Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt Minder operation Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a chime when the Distance to Empty value reaches 75 miles 120 km e The reverse sensing system cannot be turned off Optional settings These settings can be changed e Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph 130 km h Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached 80 mph 130 km h e Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected vehicle speed of 45 55 or 65 mph 75 90 or 105 km h is exceeded e The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45 MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the radio or if equipped navigation screen when attempting to exceed
249. in the Locks and security chapter When the Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled 180 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The Belt Minder feature uses two different warning chimes During the first minute of activation the warning chime will sound once every second The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second while the system is activated The driver s and front passenger s safety belts are buckled The driver s or front passenger s safety belt is not buckled when the vehicle has reached at least 6 mph and 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON The driver s or front passenger s safety belt becomes unbuckled for approximately 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph and 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON The Belt Minder feature is activated and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus The Belt Minder feature will not activate The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately fi
250. in when the vehicle is restarted e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing the SELECT RESET stem This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message If the message will not reset or clear when pressing the SELECT RESET stem you must address the problem in order to clear the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger door is not completely closed 26 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM Displayed when the electrical system is not maintaining proper voltage If you are operating electrical accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible If the warning stays on or comes on when the engine is operating at normal speeds contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is
251. in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially including information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were operating e whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled e how far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal e how fast the vehicle was traveling e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel and e longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location using GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction To access this information special equipment must be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada To the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may th
252. ing If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message center transfer case gear tooth blockage is present To alleviate this condition place the transmission in a forward gear move the vehicle forward approximately 5 feet 2 meters and shift the transmission back to neutral to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift Note Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages this is normal Note 4x4 Low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement Using the All Wheel Drive AWD system if equipped Harley Davidson only This system includes an electronically controlled transfer case The system is interactive with the road continually monitoring and adjusting torque delivery to the front and rear wheels to optimize traction 2H 4X2 Power to the rear wheels only used for street and highway driving Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds The message center will momentarily display 4X2 when this mode is selected AWD Auto Power delivered to all four wheels as required for increased traction This is appropriate for all on road driving conditions such as dry road surfaces wet pavement snow gravel and shallow sand 4H 4X4 High Used for extra traction on snow covered or icy roads and in off road situations This position is not recommended for use on dry pavement This position is only intended for severe winter or off road conditions such as deep snow
253. ing and holding a button will raise or lower the setting continuously The gain setting will display in the message center as follows TBC GAIN XX X 263 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The trailer brake controller TBC is designed to display three items of information in the instrument cluster message center These are gain setting output bar graph and trailer connectivity status They will appear as follows in the message center e TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER The instrument cluster message center will display the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain This message is also displayed during manual activation without a trailer connected or when gain adjustments are made with no trailer connected e TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT When the vehicle s brake pedal is pushed or when the manual control is activated bar indicators will illuminate in the instrument cluster message center to indicate the amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or manual control input One bar indicates the least amount of output with six bars indicating maximum output TRAILER CONNECTED This message is displayed when a correct trailer wiring connection a trailer with electric trailer brakes has been sensed during a given ignition cycle e TRAILER DISCONNECTED This message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime
254. ing chapter of this Owner s Guide WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle may tow a class I II III or IV trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts If your vehicle is not equipped with a heavy duty trailer towing package the maximum weight your vehicle can tow is limited to 5 000 lb 2 268 kg 256 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Your vehicle s load capacity is designated by weight not by volume so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components carefully periodically during and after any towing operation Exceeding the maximum GCWR could result in extensive damage to your vehicle and personal injury WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label WARNING Towing traile
255. instructions The importance of shoulder belis Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for a
256. ion T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire K Oy Ts L a ws Uo sgn nave 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 240 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label
257. ion Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO i DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG that ise Safety Comp Hance FRONT GAWR XXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB Certification Label be affixed to a XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG vehicle and prescribe where the i Fy Ae Fis Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX KPAX CPSLCOLD AT XXX KPAXX PSI COLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR ae a VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN Compliance Certification Label 1s EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE located on the structure B Pillar VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX ia Da TYPE XXX XXXXX by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s WN OT OMY AN A ITA door EXT PNT _ XX RCXX DSO WB BRK TINTTR TPIPS R TALE TR SPR XXXXK XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX _XXXX XXXXXXX XX 405 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications l a Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your Re vehicle identification number Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location 3 Make vehicl
258. ions when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the airbag Such driving also increases the risk of accidents WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided Never remove or defeat the tripping mechanisms designed into the snow removal equipment by its manufacturer Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as possible air bag deployment 316 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the air bag supplemental restraint system SRS or its fuses See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer Transmission operation while plowing e Shift transfer case to 4L 4WD Low when plowing in small areas at speeds below 5 mph 8 km h Shift transfer case to 4H 4WD High when plowing larger areas or light snow at higher speeds Do not exceed 15 mph 24 km h e Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R Reverse until the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped If the vehicle is stuck shift the transmission in a steady motion between forward and reverse gears Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes The transmission and tires may be
259. is will lock the steering wheel in position WARNING Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle is moving 85 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls POWER TILT STEERING IF EQUIPPED The steering column can be adjusted manually by moving the two way rocker adjustment control located below the turn signal wiper control stalk Hold the control to adjust The tilt function is adjusted by depressing the control up or down Easy entry exit feature When you remove the key from the ignition the column will move to the full up position if this feature is activated through the message center Refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter When the key is inserted into the ignition the column will return to the previous setting Note The easy entry exit feature will prevent the steering wheel from returning to the memory position until the key is inserted into the ignition Memory feature The steering column positions are saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the side of the driver s seat Gf equipped with memory feature Refer to Seating in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter If the steering column adjustment control is pressed during memory recall it will cancel the automatic op
260. isablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services 319 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e exact fuel amounts e towing of your disabled vehicle e emergency travel expense reimbursement e travel planning benefits In Canada for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance expiring For more information and enrollment contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for your
261. isplay the following messages TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT This message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC In the event this message is seen please contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair The TBC may still function but performance may be degraded WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER This message is displayed when a Short circuit on the electric brake output wire has occurred If the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime with no trailer connected the problem is with the vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7 pin connector in the bumper If the message is only displayed with a trailer connected the problem is related to the trailer wiring consult your trailer dealer for assistance This can be a short to ground i e chaffed wire or a short to voltage i e pulled pin on trailer emergency break away battery or trailer brakes drawing too much current 265 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred however if the fault is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford warranty Points to Remember Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first time Readjust GAIN setting on the TBC according to procedure above whenever ro
262. issimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability 331 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Park on a level surface activate the hazard flashers and set the parking brake 2 Place the gearshift in P Park and turn the engine off Location of the spare tire and tools The spare tire is located under the vehicle just forward of the rear bumper The jack jack handle and lug wrench are located in the following locations Body Style Location Regular Cab Attached to a floor bra
263. it 30 seconds before trying again Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury 274 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If you should experience cold weather starting problems on Egs ethanol and neither an alternative brand of Eg ethanol nor an engine block heater is available the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will improve cold starting performance Your vehicle is designed to operate on Egs ethanol alone unleaded gasoline alone or any mixture of the two See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on ethanol If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions flexible fuel vehicles only 1 Press and hold down the accelerator 1 3 to 1 2 way to floor then crank the engine 2 When the engine starts release the key then gradually release the accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up If the engine still fails to start repeat Step 1 Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long peri
264. ith this information before you operate your vehicle Normal characteristics On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to 4x4 while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mu
265. iving a heavily loaded vehicle Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK COLUMN SHIFT TRANSMISSION This vehicle is equipped with a park brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter If the fuse is not blown perform the following procedure Note The following procedure is easier to perform when the steering column is adjusted to the full up position Refer to Tilt steering wheel in the Driver Controls chapter 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition to the off position then remove the key 2 Move the shift lever boot by pressing on the edges and moving it up the gearshift lever N S SEn 287 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving 3 Turn the steering wheel one half turn to access the slots on each side of the steering wheel 4 Insert a flat head screwdriver into each slot to unsnap and remove the steering column cover Rotate the column up on its hinges and pull
266. kes apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the Anti lock Brake System ABS 313 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle cont
267. l If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S 350 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Cu
268. l system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury WARNING Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the funnel included with the vehicle 385 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 1 Locate the white plastic funnel It is located under the second row driver side seat near the spare tire tool box 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel system 3 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 4 When done clean the funnel or properly dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with the Easy Fuel system and can damage it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We d
269. l automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection 3 S Manual override control Allows you to manually select where airflow is directed To return to full automatic control press AUTO When choosing to control airflow manually press repeatedly to toggle through the settings to choose e ee Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents de mister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents floor vents rear seat floor vents and de mister vents e 2 Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents 62 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 4 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C GY defrost and Y floor defrost 5 AUTO Press to engage automatic temperature control Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 6 MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrumen
270. l valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm sx 7y When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulge
271. lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer 290 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4 speed automatic transmission Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage during coasting or deceleration When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal Your vehicle s automatic transmission is equipped with a special shift strategy that ensures maximum heater performance during cold weather operation When ambient temperature is 23 F 5 C or below and the engine coolant temperature is below 100 F 88 C light throttle upshifts may be slightly delayed Once the engine coolant temperature reaches 160 F 71 C the normal shift strategy will resume This is normal operation and will not affect the function or the durability of the transmission If the normal shift strategy does not resume once the engine coolant temperature reaches the normal operating temperature or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function normally see your authorized dealer as soon as
272. lar Cab properly restrain the child in the center front unless doing so would interfere with driving the vehicle This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt protection for all occupants and airbag protection for the adults All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts Ensure the child is properly restrained in an appropriate child seat or with the use of a booster A child or infant properly restrained in the center front seat should not incur risk of serious injury from the airbags How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic
273. lassification SENSOR seis ccs oavesavternctevsbntietacsy aes 167 warning light and CHIME 000 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 179 180 417 Index Safety restraints LATCH anchors censore Safety seats for children Safety Compliance Certification Label 0 00000 Satellite Radio Gf equipped Satellite Radio Information DOMES aen nEaN child safety seats 00 CIEANING ciscisscestessacintgiigancstecess climate control 64 67 159 easy access easyout feature 155 heated occ 62 157 165 memory Seat eee 132 155 SecuriCode keyless entry SV SUC 4 ETE EE E ERA SecuriLock passive anti theft SNL e Da E 138 140 Servicing your vehicle Setting the clock cccceeeees AM FM stereo ccecce Snowplowing 6 315 316 SOS Post Crash Alert Spark plugs specifications 399 404 405 Special notice ambulance conversions 00 four wheel drive vehicles utility type vehicles 0 0 Specification chart IWbricantS 3 sccessanaeiie sie Speed control oo cceeeeeeeeeeees Starting a flex fuel vehicle Starting your VENCE voies 271 272 274 JUMP Starting sristi ion 418 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Steering wheel CONOS snee n R 101 HINE sereias 85 86 Stereo 6 CD in dash soria 42 CD MP3 raerce na 42 SYNG reire ae iT 58 T Tailga
274. lays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter To determine your average highway fuel economy do the following 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the SELECT RESET stem press and hold for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 23 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem when this message is displayed to get into the SETUP menu The following setup items are available OIL LIFE This displays the remaining oil life An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message cent
275. ld be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 373 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not
276. le doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait 30 seconds Note All doors must be closed and remain closed throughout the configuration process 1 Turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp 127 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 6 Press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry keypad procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position Close all doors Enter 5 digit entry code Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled ao eA W LD Message center procedure For information on activating deactivating the autolock feature using the vehicle s message center refer to Messag
277. le for hours e Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury 379 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation e Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline and or ethanol vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction e FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent ethanol Any fuel blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as Fuel Ethanol Flex fuel
278. letely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product Tanners Preserve Leather Cleaner and a 3M Type T scrubbing pad e Clean spills as quickly as possible e Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather For more specific cleaning information contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1 800 282 KING 5464 e Do not spill coffee ketchup mustard orange juice or oil based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl or plastics 360 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning Scratches Natural Markings Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings such as small scars These markings give character to the seating covers and should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioning section Conditioning Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop Visit the Web site at www krsaddleshop com or telephone in the United States 1 800 282 KING 5464
279. lipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turn around because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control 312 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control When you brake hard the front wheels can t turn and if they aren t turning you won t be able to steer The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still maintain steering control If your vehicle has anti lock bra
280. ller plug 2 Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level 3 Add only enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 396 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Changing the air filter element 1 Locate the mass air flow sensor electrical connector on the air outlet tube This connector will need to be unplugged 2 Reposition the locking clip on the connector connector shown from below for clarity squeeze the connector and pull it off of the air outlet tube 3 Clean the area around the air tube to air cover connection to prevent debris from entering the system and then loosen the bolt on the air tube clamp so the clamp is no longer snug to the air tube It is not necessary to completely remove the clamp 4 Pull the air tube off from the air
281. m protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter 384 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The service engine soon tc indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter Refilling with a portable fuel container With the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system use the following directions when filling from a portable fuel container WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fue
282. m side rails or other attachments may be positioned in the front header bar to secure loads up to 600 Ib 272 kg per cleat maximum of two cleats e Cleats and other attachments may be inserted through the access window located in the center of the header bar These items can then be slid to either side and secured the same way as the side rails 121 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Cross bars Aluminum cross bars with T slot channels in all four sides and a latch mechanism that allows the end supports to snap over the existing cleats Cross bars are rated to hold loads up to 100 lb 45 kg load evenly distributed between the two crossbars and the T slots are sized to accept industry standard roof rack accessories e To remove cross bar lift handle on each side and lift end support shroud off of the cleat e To install cross bar align cleats directly across from each other on the same rail upper or lower Then place crossbar end support onto cleat and press down on each side until the latch handle cycles up and then press the handle down to secure pull up on the bars to ensure they are securely attached e To install accessories into T slots remove cross bar and turn upside down then find the slip joint end indicated with an arrow embossed on the bottom of the support Using a T25 Torx driver remove two Torx head bolts from bottom and slide end support off of aluminum extrusion
283. mation menu Press and release the SELECT RESET stem located in the speedometer to cycle through the following features TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press and release INFO button until the A or B trip appears in the display this represents the trip mode Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to reset Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to English 22 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster MYKEY MILES km if programmed For more information refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter MILES km TO E This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty Press RESET to clear this warning message It will return at approximately 25 miles 40 km 10 miles 16 km and 0 miles 0 km miles to empty Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is re initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected AVG MPG L 100km Average fuel economy disp
284. me on position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer 74 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Vertical aim adjustment 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height from the center of your headlamp indicated by a 3 0 mm circle on the lens to the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall 4 On the wall or screen you will observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge towards the right If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line lt gt Ss SIA ROE 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp then use a P2 Philips screwdriver to
285. med 32 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 9 MYKEY S PROGRAMMED 10 ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED OIL LIFE This displays the remaining oil life An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months perform the following 1 Press and release the SETUP button to display OIL LIFE XXx HOLD RESET NEW 2 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100 Note To change oil life 100 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months to another value proceed to Step 3 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press the RESET button to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 10 Note Oil life start value of 100 equals 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months For example setting oil life start value to 60 sets the oil life start value to 4 500 miles 7 200 km and 219 days UNITS Displays the current units in English or Metric Press the RESET button to change from English to Metric AUTOLAMP SEC This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off Press the RESET button to select the new autolamp delay values
286. mentarily pull the switch rearward to auto fold in 3 Momentarily pull the switch rearward again to fold back to design position The powerfold mirrors may be moved inward outward manually However if a mirror is moved manually it will need to be reset A mirror which has not been reset may appear to be loose To reset with the switch in the center position momentarily pull the switch rearward to fold the mirrors in An audible click will be heard indicating re synchronization If the click is not heard use the switch to fold the mirrors out then in until the click is heard After that the mirrors will operate normally until they are again moved manually Note 10 or more switch activations within one minute or repeated folding unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during full travel may cause the system to disable the fold unfold function to protect motors from overheating Should this occur wait approximately three minutes with the vehicle running and up to 10 minutes with the vehicle off for the system to reset and for function to return to normal Heated outside mirrors if equipped Heated mirrors remove ice mist and fog To activate the heated mirrors press the rear defrost button rp located on the climate control panel Refer to Rear window defroster in the Climate Controls chapter for more information 95 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls On
287. n and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed 369 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark PREMU SYNTHETIC BL MOTOR OIL Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To pr
288. n contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Easy Fuel no cap fuel system Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel no cap fuel filler system This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system The Easy Fuel system is self sealing and protected against dust dirt water and snow ice 381 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the fuel filler door 3 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system Pump fuel as normal 4 After you are done pumping fuel slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle Note A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below and in front of the fuel filler door If the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message comes on the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed The inlet may have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing At the next opp
289. n damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected 233 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life e Rear Wheel Drive
290. n dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fue
291. n for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible 55 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle e Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music channels ov
292. n on this feature refer to Accessing and using your USB port in the SYNC supplement or Navigation System supplement 52 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface e Inspect discs before playing e Clean only with an approved CD cleaner e Wipe discs from the center out Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion 53 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems CD units are designed to play commercially
293. n the normal operating temperature 4 between H and C Yer H 21 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Yellow area warning the transmission fluid is higher than normal operating temperature This can be caused by special operation conditions i e snowplowing towing or off road use Refer to Special Operating Conditions in the scheduled maintenance information for instructions Operating the transmission for extended periods of time with the gauge in the yellow area may cause internal transmission damage Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower the transmission temperature into the normal range Red area over temperature the transmission fluid is overheating L Stop the vehicle to allow the G temperature to return to normal range If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area stop the vehicle and verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow through the grill If the gauge continues to show high temperatures see your authorized dealer STANDARD MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime The message center display is located in the instrument cluster Selectable features infor
294. n the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened High beams lluminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened GAUGES Standard instrument cluster ae AWOD A V O HOD 18 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Platinum instrument cluster Harley Davidson instrument cluster HARLEY DAVIDSON 19 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and N C If it enters the red section the C engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Message center in the this 0000608 0 mi chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys e With standard message center Press the SELECT
295. n to increase each time the moon roof is closed for the first three closing cycles with bounce back active For example Bounce back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon roof or seals To vent the moon roof Press and release the TILT control the moon roof will move to the vent position automatically from any moon roof position Press the switch again to stop the moon roof Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moon roof 103 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls The moon roof has a built in sliding shade that can be manually opened or closed when the glass panel is shut To close the shade pull it toward the front of the vehicle UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED The appearance of your vehicle s universal garage door opener will vary according to your option package Before programing make sure your transmitter matches the graphic in the procedure HomeLink Car2U Home Automation System HomeLink Wireless Control System if equipped The HomeLink Wireless Control System located on the driver s visor provides a convenient way to ey replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in O O device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting WARNING When programming your HomeLink
296. nagement retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy management retractors section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required The Restraints Control Module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors and the driver seat position sensor In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not iluminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently
297. nate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional When the front passenger seat is not occupied empty seat or in the event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate the indicator lamp will be unlit The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit
298. nd is not visible unless the tire is removed Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 242 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The Low Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer
299. nd new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys 139 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle Only SecuriLock keys can be used To program a coded key yourself you will need two previously programmed coded keys Keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously G programmed coded key into the ignition 2 Turn the ignition from the 1 off Q position to the 3 on position Keep 4 the ignition in the 3 on position S for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the first coded key from the ignition 4 After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position insert the second previously coded key into the ignition 5 Turn t
300. nds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion USB port if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with a USB port located on the instrument LI O panel This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices t memory sticks and also to charge devices if they support this feature For further informatio
301. nes Do not add fluid if the level is in this range 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type 392 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as ii the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced a Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are MAX outside of the normal operating MIN range the performance of the system could be compromised seek ECS service from your authorized dealer immediately TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking 4 speed automatic transmission fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature approximat
302. ng suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle 232 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading It is recommended that the two front tires or two
303. ng a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining Leather seats for the King Ranch SuperCrew only if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium top grain leather which is extremely durable but still requires special care and maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the leather Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading of the material Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining Cleaning For dirt use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean damp cloth or soft brush For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap If the leather cannot be comp
304. ng gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Drive only e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat 296 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Reverse Sensing System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speed
305. ng to the zone map 2 Turn ignition to the on position 3 Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio preset buttons together for approximately five seconds until ZONE XX appears in the CID 4 Press and release the 7 and 9 radio preset buttons together repeatedly until ZONE XX changes to the correct zone 1 15 in the CID 5 The direction will display after the buttons are released The zone is now updated Compass calibration adjustment Driver Controls 6 39 NE 6 39 Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 1 Start the vehicle 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 89 Driver Controls 2 To calibrate press and hold the 7 and 9 radio preset buttons together for approximately 10 seconds until CAL appears Release the buttons 3 Slowly drive the vehicle in a lt gt circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CAL display changes to the 6 39 direction value N S E W etc It may take up to five circles to gt complete calibration 4 The compass is now calibrated AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow th
306. ngue so that it is parallel to the webbing and slide the tongue upward 3 Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the buckle How to fasten the cinch tongue Regular Cab center only 1 Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and chest 2 Be sure the belt is not twisted If the belt is twisted remove the twist 3 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch 4 Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue WARNING The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips not across the waist WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person 173 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints While you are fastened in the safety belt the combination lap shoulder belt with a cinch
307. ning when necessary See the TPMS reset procedure in this chapter INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 235 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indic
308. nly tracks mileage when a MyKey is used If mileage does not accumulate as expected then the MyKey is not being used by the intended user The only way to reset this odometer to zero is by disabling MyKey If this odometer is lower than the last time you checked then the MyKey system has been recently cleared o MYKEY S PROGRAMMED Indicates how many MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect deletion of a MyKey e ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED Indicates how many Admin keys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect if an additional spare key has been programmed to the vehicle Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey system warnings displays Using MyKey with Remote Start Systems MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system Vehicles equipped with traditional keys When using a Ford approved remote start system the default settings will recognize the remote start system as an additional Admin Key with its associated privileges Owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys should program the remote start system as a MyKey in addition to the key that they have already programmed as a MyKey To program the remote start system as MyKey do the following 1 Enter the vehicle and close all
309. not recommended for use on good traction surfaces such as dry pavement Doing so may result in abnormal driving behavior while cornering and excessive tire wear PREPARING TO DRIVE WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground clearance giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death 286 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Do not overload your vehicle and use extra precautions such as driving at slower speeds avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance when dr
310. nt equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying Safety Canopy Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The Safety Canopy could injure you as it deploys from the headliner WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Safety Canopy System its fuses the A B or C pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety Canopy System is provided WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy 196 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the Safety Canopy system work The design and development of the Safety Canopy system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy The Safety Canopy system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon curtain
311. nt so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position 149 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly Front seat e Lift the track release bar to move the seat forward or rearward Make sure that the seat is relatched into place 150 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Pull the release lever handle located on the side of the seat up to move the seatback forward or backward Using the armrest if equipped e Push the release control to move the armrest up or down e Pull out the drawer at the bottom of the center seat to access the cup holders if equipped 151 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e To gain access to the storage compartment if equipped in your armrest lift the latch to open the lid Using the manual lumbar support For more lumbar support turn the lumbar support control toward the front of vehicle For less lumbar support turn the lumbar support control toward the rear of vehicle 152 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
312. nut wheel 10 Stow the flat tire Refer to Stowing the flat spare tire 11 Stow the jack and lug wrench Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive 12 Unblock the wheels Stowing the flat spare tire Note Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack hardware 2 Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable 336 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness Tighten to the best of your ability to the point where the ratchet slip occurs if possible The spare tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience 4 Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened Try to push or pull then turn the tire to be sure it will not move Loosen
313. o inform you of something you may need to take action on or be informed of e Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is restarted e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by the ABS module 35 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM Displayed when the electrical system is not maintaining proper voltage If you are operating electrical accessories when the engine is idling at a low sp
314. o not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 8 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your 386 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading may result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting low medium high each time the tank i
315. o provide proper cooling may increase fan noise that may also be noticed under conditions other than snow plowing F 150 SuperCrew Limited and Harley Davidson F 150 are not recommended for snowplowing and the Snow Plow Prep Package is not available Installing the snowplow Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow can be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book Snowplow section found at www fleet ford com truckbbas A typical installation affects the following e Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection and airbag deployment braking and lighting Look for an Alterer s Label on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS e The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity TARC is shown on the lower right side of the vehicle s Safety Certification Label This is the weight of permanently attached auxiliary equipment such as snowplow frame mounting hardware that can be added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to FMVSS Exceeding this weight may require the auxiliary equipment installer additional safety certification responsibility The Front Accessory Reserve Capacity FARC is added for customer convenience e Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent exceeding the FGAWR and provide front to rear weight balance for proper braking an
316. obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 Ib 227 to 340 kg For an 11 500 lb 5 216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1 725 to 2 875 lb 782 to 1 304 kg WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations 254 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ib on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ib and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb 1
317. ock remove button 4 147 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position 2 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint A 3 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve adjust release button and l pushing down on the head restraint Ae Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied 148 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment A position 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust release button and A the unlock remove button then pull up on the head restraint To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks v ye Properly adjust the head restrai
318. od of time open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C For flexible fuel vehicles if operating with Eg ethanol an engine block heater must be used if ambient temperature is below 0 F 18 C See Cold weather starting earlier in this chapter for more information on starting with ethanol 275 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord
319. of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds AUTOLOCK This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion Press the RESET button to turn autolock on or off 33 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster AUTOUNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off Press the RESET button to turn autounlock on or off RUNNING BOARDS if equipped This feature automatically deploys the side running boards for easy entry exit from the vehicle or for cleaning 1 To disable enable the power running board feature with the vehicle in P Park select this function from the SETUP button for the current display mode i the RESET button to select the running boards setting as ollows e AUTO the running boards will automatically deploy when a door is opened and automatically retract when the door is closed e OUT the running boards will remain deployed regardless of the doors being open closed This setting can be used when washing the vehicle or accessing the roof rack The running boards will stow and enter AUTO mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph 8 km h e OFF the running boards will remain IN regardless of the doors being oper closed EASY ENTRY This feature automatically moves the driver s seat backwards for easy exit
320. of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position 170 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming r from until you hear a snap and feel Kk r C it latch Make sure the tongue is V securely fastened in the buckle CA D J 2 To unfasten push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle N 171 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Regular Cab Center front safety belt WARNING Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the Regular Cab center seating position If you carry large
321. off certain features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle To switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system press the AdvanceTrac with RSC button Full features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system can be restored by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC button again or by turning off and restarting the engine If you switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the sliding car icon igi will illuminate steadily Pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC button again will turn off the sliding car icon f In R Reverse ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction control features will continue to function however ESC and RSC are disabled AdvanceTrac with RSC Features Button Sliding car z Illuminated chee during bulb Enabled Enabled Enabled start up check Button pressed Illuminated Enabled Enabled seated momentarily solid Button pressed and held for more than five Flashes then seconds at illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled vehicle speed solid under 35 mph 56 km h 283 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving AdvanceTrac with RSC Features Button Sliding car Vehicle speed exceeds 35 mph 56 km h after button is iluminated aiea Enabled Disabled pressed and solid held for mor
322. ol system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle Turn to increase decrease the air temperature on the driver side of the vehicle The control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when PASS TEMP is disengaged The recommended initial setting is between 72 F 22 C and 75 F 24 C then adjust for comfort The driver side temperature setting will appear in the upper left corner of the display 63 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 12 Ss Front fan speed control Press to decrease the fan speed 13 A Rear defroster if equipped Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors the same button will activate both 13 B Oi Heated mirrors if equipped Press to activate deactivate This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH HEATED AND COOLED SEATS IF EQUIPPED Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter l e Fan speed control Press to increase the fan speed 2 Ct Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and de mister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice
323. on keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners 371 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid
324. on of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits i Rating Powertrain control module PCM power relay Pp TC Starter relay PTC Blower motor relay po Heated backiite relay 6 o Teorie fan relay high speed ps rier tow park lamp reay fitter relay s 6 p93 __riter tow battery charger Poitier 2 relay 326 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits P Clutch relay O PAT Up fitter delay o O P Heated mirror relay _ 26 10A PCM keep alive power Canister vent solenoid Transmission PCM relay o B Noted S P85 Noted S O 37 Trailer tow left hand stop turn relay 38 Trailer tow right hand stop turn relay 327 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Lire ee ee P89 Back uplampsrelay Po 40 CC Electric fan relay O P Noted S PoE Noted S O POE gt Noted S P52 Noted S O 54 5A 4x4 module Back u
325. on to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy 387 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Habits Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy Slow down gradually Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capa
326. ors are opened or the accessory delay timer expires BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembly condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present 78 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void th
327. ortion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out and a click is heard AA 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6 207 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side
328. ortunity safely pull off the road turn off the engine open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel see Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and or allow the inlet to close properly If this action corrects the problem the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury 382 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Flex Fuel Vehicle FFV fuel fill inlet If your vehicle is flex fuel capable it will have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel fill inlet bp Choosing the right fuel If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle FFV
329. orward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects placed on the seat cushion For most objects that are in the front passenger seat the passenger airbag will be disabled Even though the passenger airbag is disabled the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated according to the table below 191 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Pass Airbag Off 7 Small i e three ring Unlit Disabled binder small purse bottled water Medium i e heavy Lit Disabled briefcase fully packed luggage Empty seat or small Lit Disabled to medium object with safety belt buckled In case there is a problem with the e front passenger sensing system the airbag readiness lamp in the IN instrument cluster will stay lit DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer WARNING The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center seating position WAR
330. osition and keep the key in the ignition 246 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 3 Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off Tires Wheels and Loading 4 Turn the hazard flashers on then off 3 times This must be accomplished within ten seconds If the reset mode has been entered successfully the horn will sound once the TPMS indicator will flash and the message center if equipped will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE If this does not occur please try again starting at step 2 If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode the horn does not sound the TPMS indicator l does not flash and the message center if equipped does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE seek service from your authorized dealer 5 Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise order e Left front Driver s side front tire e Right front Passenger s side front tire e Right rear Passenger s side rear tire e Left rear Driver s side rear tire 6 Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds Note The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been learned by the module for this position If a double horn is heard the reset procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated 7 Remove the valve cap from the valv
331. oster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat 219 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips 220 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s
332. otect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this chapter for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application 370 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operati
333. otorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to rem
334. ou have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges 229 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires and whee
335. ount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag See an authorized dealer WARNING All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided 193 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the side airbag system work The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags The side airbag system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon bag airbag with a gas generator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver an
336. our player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE LINE IN or SYNC LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 51 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sou
337. our vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and all fuel related parts WARNING Turn off the power running boards if equipped before working under the vehicle jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 363 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD mp 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel
338. ove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer 354 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations 4 6L ENGINE 355 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning 5 4L ENGINE PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic pa
339. ow mode is not intended for use on dry pavement Note For proper operation in 4X4 Low ensure the transfer case shift lever is moved entirely rearward in to the 4L 4X4 Low position and that the 4x4 Low light is displayed in the message center Note Ideal 4L 4X4 Low shift conditions occur when the vehicle is rolling at a speed below 3 mph 5 km h and the transmission is in N Neutral Using the N Neutral position The transfer case N Neutral position overrides the transmission and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift lever position The vehicle can move forward or backward This position should only be used when towing the vehicle WARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle 303 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Using the electronic shift 4WD system if equipped 2H 4X2 Power to the rear wheels only used for street and highway driving Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds 4H 4X4 High Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off road situations Not intended for use on dry pavement AL 4X4 Low Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all four wheels at reduced speeds Intended only for off road applications such as deep sand steep grades or pulling h
340. p lamp RSC i i an Trailer tow battery charge relay 55 5A Electronic compass mirror 6R orion an e Prot used Notus S One touch Start diode Fuel pump diode __ Upitter3 relay 25A 25A panel 20A Auxiliary power point inside center console 60 328 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Jie ig Oo 6 O Notusd o used SS 69 B0A Passenger heated cooled seats POE i Noted S 7 Po Noted S O 73 Po Noted S O 76 20A Voltage power 2 Voltage battery voltage Mass air flow Intake air temp CMS 12 and 22 with 6R80 transmission Brake on off switch BOO TT 10A Voltage power 3 Electric fan clutch A C clutch relay coil Floor an ae 4 speed transmission o 78 SA Ignition coils Voltage power 4___ 10A E 4 speed transmission 12 and ea 22 with 4 speed uianSitisson 80 5A Steering wheel illumination o o a s i Notus S O 82 10A Trailer brake control module TBCM After market center high mounted stop lamp CHMSL P88 Noted S O P84 Noted p85 CC Electric fan relay low speed Mini Fuses Cartridge Fuses 329 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel fi
341. pascal a metric unit of air pressure PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated 227 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if
342. passenger side of the vehicle Di ay Passenger heated seat if equipped Press to control the passenger heated seat Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 6 ac Passenger cooled seat if equipped Press to control the passenger cooled seat Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 7 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle when used with A C and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C 8 Fan speed control Press to decrease increase the fan speed 9 AUTO Press to engage full automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 10 Driver temperature Press to increase decrease the air temperature for the driver side of the vehicle This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disen
343. pedals and steering column if equipped to the desired memory position Note The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled 132 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Activating the memory feature To activate this feature 1 Position the seat power mirrors adjustable pedals and steering column if equipped to the desired positions 2 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver s seat for five seconds A tone will be heard after Ly 11 2 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds then release the control n 3 3 Within three seconds press the control on the remote entry transmitter 4 A tone will be heard when the activation is complete 5 Repeat this procedure for another remote entry transmitter if desired Deactivating the memory feature To deactivate this feature 1 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver s seat memory switch for five seconds A tone will be heard after 112 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds then release the control 2 Within three seconds press the control on the remote entry transmitter 3 A tone will be heard when the deactivation is complete 4 Repeat this procedure for another remote entry transmitte
344. possible P Park This position locks the transmission PRND21 and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear e Release the parking brake To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park 291 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through four Overdrive can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift boo Goan lever C ee lt The transmission control indicator 0 D TCIL will illuminate on the instrument cluster OFF Drive not shown Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed e This position allows for all forward gears ex
345. previous next folder 45 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current disc or MP3 folder DIRECT In CD mode Press DIRECT The display will read DIRECT TRACK MODE SELECT TRACK Enter the desired track number using the memory preset buttons 0 9 The system will then begin playing that track In MP3 folder mode Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons 0 9 of the desired folder The system will advance to that specific track in the folder selected TEXT In MP3 mode only Press TEXT repeatedly to view Album AL Folder FL Song SO and Artist AR in the display if available In TEXT MODE Sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the indicator is active press TEXT and then press lt SEEK P to view the additional display text COMPRESSION Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON OFF appears in the display Use lt SEEK P to toggle between ON OFF When COMPRESSION is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level SHUFFLE Press MENU repeatedly until SHUFFLE ON OFF appears in the display Use lt SEEK P to toggle between ON OFF If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press lt SEEK P to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing The system will only shuffle the disc
346. programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to MyKey with Remote Start Systems section Cannot disable MyKey e Key in the ignition is a MyKey e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to MyKey with Remote Start Systems section Lost the only Admin key e Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer 145 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Potential Causes Lost any key e For programming spare keys refer to the Programming spare keys section in this chapter I accidentally programmed all e Vehicle has a remote start system keys as MyKeys that is recognized as an Admin key Refer to the Using MyKey with Remote Start Systems section to reset all MyKeys as Admin keys MyKey Programmed total e Unknown key has been programmed includes one additional key to the vehicle as a MyKey e Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system Refer to MyKey with Remote Start Systems section Admin Keys Programmed total e Unknown key has been programmed includes one additional key to the vehicle as Admin key e Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system Refer to MyKey with Remote Start Systems section MyKey mile
347. properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children F Recommended A Child size height weight or age Tanai ae Infants or Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or less Use a child safety toddlers generally age four or younger seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Children who have outgrown or no Use a longer properly fit in a child safety belt positioning seat generally children who are less booster seat than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 lb 86 kg and upward to 100 lb 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer 200 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Recommended fa Child size height weight or age Paa iene Larger Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle children longer properly fit in a belt positioning safety belt having booster seat generally children who the lap belt snug are at least 4 feet 9 inches and low across 1 45 meters tall or greater than 80 Ib the hips shoulder 36 kg or 100 lb 45 kg if belt centered recommended by child restraint across the manufactur
348. properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 202 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the pro
349. r authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper coverage and operation Night time and dark area use At night time or in dark areas the camera system relies on the reverse lamp lighting to produce an image Therefore it is necessary that both reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark If either of the lamps are not operating stop using the camera system at least in the dark until the lamp s are replaced and functioning 300 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Servicing e If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer e If the image is not clear then check if there is anything covering the lens such as dirt mud ice snow etc If the image is still not clear after cleaning have your system inspected by your authorized dealer FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD OPERATION IF EQUIPPED WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter Four wheel drive 4WD supplies power to all four wheels 4WD should not be operated on dry pavement driveline damage may occur If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System and 4X4 Low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph 5 km h the 4WD system will not perform a shift This is normal and should be no reason for concern Refer to Shifting to from 4L 4X
350. r condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 348 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound
351. r if desired Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent 133 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER 2 Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board 3 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Snap the two halves back together Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost transmitters If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it from the vehicle s memory or you would like to purchase additional remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle e Take all your vehicle s transmitters to your authorized dealer for programming or e Pe
352. r rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child seats installed in the outboard rear seats Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to the loop directly behind the child seat To provide a tight tether strap 1 Route the tether strap under the head restraint and through the loop directly behind the child seat 2 Route the tether strap behind the head restraint supports to a loop behind an adjacent seating position and hook the strap hook onto the loop If using the driver s side pass the strap behind the shoulder belt mounting for the center seat e Always put the tether strap through the routing loop The head restraint support post will hold the child seat tightly but the head restraint post is not strong enough to hold the child seat during a collision 217 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler sea
353. r slippery surfaces e Changing lanes on a snow rutted road e Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa e Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa e Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter The Electronic Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following Roll Stability Control RSC Roll Stability Control RSC may help to maintain roll stability of the vehicle during adverse maneuvers RSC operates by detecting the vehicle s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually During an event that activates the Roll Stability Control RSC the sliding car icon igi in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability Control system which include e Emergency lane change e Taking a turn too fast e Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle 282 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The Roll Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following Switching off AdvanceTrac with RSC If the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand and seems to lose engine power switching
354. raking assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability Note This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 30 40 km h 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly adjusted See your trailer dealer if necessary 2 Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer s instructions 3 When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in the TRAILER CONNECTED message will display in the instrument cluster message center 4 Use the GAIN adjustment buttons to increase or decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point A GAIN setting of 6 0 is a good starting point for heavier loads 5 In a traffic free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 30 40 km h and squeeze the manual control lever completely 6 If the trailer wheels lock up indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lock up If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 Explanation of instrument cluster warning messages The TBC interacts with the instrument cluster message center to d
355. re or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire 271 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine s idle revolutions per minute RPM When the engine starts the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked If the vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions the engine air induction may become partially clogged with snow and or ice If this occurs the engine may
356. re pressure is low If the light remains on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Low tire pressure warning 0 O Overdrive off if equipped 0 D Illuminates when the overdrive function of the transmission has OFF been turned off refer to the Driving chapter If the light does not illuminate have the transmission serviced soon or damage may occur Transmission Tow Haul Feature TOW six speed transmission only HAUL Displays when the Tow Haul feature has been activated Refer to the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation If the light flashes steadily have the system serviced immediately damage to the transmission could occur 16 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster AdvanceTrac Traction control RTT Cif equipped Displays o when the AdvanceTrac Traction control is active If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately refer to the Driving chapter for more information 4X2 RTT Cif equipped Displays momen
357. rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has bee
358. rely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Overdrive with Tow Haul Off The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six D Overdrive with Tow Haul On The Tow Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load All transmission gear ranges are available when using Tow Haul Tow Haul can be activated by pressing the transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever column shift transmission or on the side of the gearshift lever floor shift transmission 294 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Column shift transmission C TOW HAUL lt 1 e Floor shift transmission The TOW HAUL indicator light will TOW illuminate in the instrument cluster HAUL Tow Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting Tow Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the transmission is in the D
359. rform the programming procedure yourself 134 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Programming remote transmitters It is necessary to have all maximum of four original and or new of your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure If all remote entry transmitters are not present during the programming procedure the transmitters that are not present during programming will no longer operate the vehicle To program the transmitters yourself Note Ensure the brake pedal is not depressed during this sequence e Unlock all doors using the power door lock unlock control Insert a key and turn the ignition from the 1 off to the 3 on position and cycle between 1 off and 3 on eight times in rapid succession within 10 seconds with the eighth turn ending in the 3 on position The locks will cycle to confirm that the programming mode has been entered e Within 20 seconds program a remote transmitter by pressing any button on a transmitter The locks will cycle once to confirm that the remote transmitter has been programmed If more than 20 seconds pass before pressing a remote transmitter button the programming mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated e Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters The locks will cycle once to confirm that each remote transmitter has been programmed e When you have completed pro
360. right Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 362 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in y
361. rini 59 62 64 67 Dipstick Clock adjust automatic transmission AM FM oooi 43 EMU E E 393 395 AM FM Stereo cecccccccccccccccececceeeee 42 eNPINE O1l O E 368 Compass electronic s 88 Driving under special Calibration iiic 89 conditions s 296 309 312 set zone adjustment EERE A AEE 89 eT aTa A 311 SNOW and ICO iesisiissiisriisiiioes 313 CONSOLE 5 s 3 2eisiseixcsso esdeecsededesssezeis 88 through water occ 311 314 Controls power Seat cceccccccccesseeeseeees 153 E steering column se nssseeosseeee 101 Coolant Electronic message center 22 30 checking and adding 373 Emergencies roadside refill capacities 376 400 jJump starting oo eee 338 SPCCINCALIONS ccseshccstccewesctsee 400 running out of fuel 338 385 Cruise control Emission control system 389 see Speed control 1 98 Engine o 404 405 Customer Assistance 00 319 Cleaning x6 A nazsdaydeeocsinkevereunevsects 355 414 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus COOIATIEG 2 402 ae eter aE 373 fail safe cooling ce 377 idle speed control 371 lubrication specifications 400 refill capacities 0000000000000 400 service points serseri 365 366 Engine block heater 275 Engine Oil secessucdsccssveetienssiaeacsses 368 checking and adding 368 GIPSUICK ssissscssicisccsscaientoriesecaciaie 368 filter specifi
362. rmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used WARNING Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the diss
363. rn off Refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors if equipped WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place Memory feature if equipped The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s seat Refer to Memory seats and mirrors in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Automatic dimming feature if equipped The driver s side view mirror has an auto dimming function For more information refer to Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror in this chapter 94 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Fold away mirrors Fold the side mirrors in carefully before driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash Powerfold mirrors if equipped With powerfold mirrors you can fold gy the side mirrors using the power mirror switch 1 Rotate the switch to the center neutral position 2 Mo
364. rol which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder racks or pickup box cover Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off road usage DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom SZ of the whe
365. rolled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 142 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 238 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading
366. rough any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location and or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs How
367. rs Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency
368. rs beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Regular Cab 4x2 126 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 257 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Regular Cab 4x2 145 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 5 4L Heavy 3 73 16700 7575 11300 5126 Duty Regular Cab 4x4 145 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 5 4L 5 4L Heavy 3 73 17000 7711 11300 5126 Duty SuperCab 4x2 145 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 4 6L 2V 4 6L 3V i 258 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading SuperCab 4x2 145 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 14000 6350 8600 3900 5 4L 15200 6895 9800 4445 16900 7666 11300 5126 SuperCab 4x4 145 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg LV 5500 2495 et 1900 583 9400 4268 8300 3765 9700 4400 3 73 15400 6985 9700 4400 17100 7756
369. rts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer 356 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as the
370. s Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in reverse and when using the RSS WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps 297 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet 2 meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a warning the radio volume may be reduced to a predetermin
371. s you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information Artist information not not available available at this time on this channel The system is working properly NO TEXT Song title Song title information not information not available at this time on available this channel The system is working properly 57 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required NO SIGNAL UPDATING CALL SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 Category Category information not information not available at this time on available this channel The system is working properly Loss of signal from You are in a location that the SIRIUS satellite is blocking the SIRIUS or SIRIUS tower to signal i e tunnel under the vehicle antenna an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return Update of channel No action required The programming in process may take up to progress three minutes Satellite service has Call SIRIUS at been deactivated by 1 888 539 7474 to SIRIUS Satellite re activate or resolve Radio subscription issues NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system Ref
372. s a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature e The engine will completely shut down e Steering and braking effort will increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine dama
373. s does not e MyKey is not being used by the accumulate intended user e MyKey system has been recently cleared 146 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion The adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e a guide sleeve adjust release button 8 e and a guide sleeve unl
374. s filled Allow no more than three automatic click offs when filling Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added Gn gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give considerati
375. s in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended 230 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
376. s the lights on for approximately 20 seconds or on vehicles equipped with a message center you can select a delay from 0 180 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to off e To turn autolamps on rotate the control to W e To turn autolamps off rotate the control to If your vehicle is not equipped with a message center then the auto lamps can be programmed manually by 1 Start with the ignition in off and the autolamps w selected 2 Turn off the autolamps by turning the headlamp switch to O 3 Turn the ignition to on 4 Turn the ignition to off 5 Select the autolamps by turning the headlamp switch to W Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a 10 second period At this point the headlamps and park lamps will turn on 6 Deselect the autolamps after the desired autolamp delay time maximum of three minutes 72 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights At this point the headlamps and park lamps will turn off Fog lamp control if equipped 0 The headlamp control also operates the fog lamps The fog lamps can be turned on only when the headlamp control is in the gD amp or P position and the high beams are not turned on Pull headlamp control towards you to turn fog lamps on The fog lamp indicator light will illuminate High beams ZD Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull ys the lever toward you to deactivate Ss Flas
377. sage It will return at approximately 25 miles 40 km 10 miles 16 km and 0 miles 0 km miles to empty Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is re initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected AVG MPG L 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter To determine your average highway fuel economy do the following 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the RESET button press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings 31
378. seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle The passenger seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether anchors in your vehicle may be loops of webbing above the seatback or an anchor bracket behind the seat on the rear edge of the seat cushion The rear seat in the SuperCab and SuperCrew has three straps along the top of the seatback that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view e F150 Regular Cab 9 e F150 SuperCrew and SuperCab L i 8 Ir L Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap 215 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front seat tether strap attachment 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap
379. self Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 km To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel by the radio The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists 320 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the off position 2 Turn the ignition switch to the on position In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you tr
380. service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 13 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Electronic throttle control RTT if equipped Displays ee when the engine has defaulted to a limp home operation Report the fault to a dealer at the earliest opportunity The message center will also display ENGINE FAILSAFE MODE Refer to Message center in this chapter Check 4X4 RTT if equipped Displays with the message CHECK ee 4X4
381. sits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible If your vehicle is equipped with running boards do not use rubber plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running board surface as the area may become slippery Exterior chrome Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface 353 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e After polishing chrome bumpers apply a coating of Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives use M
382. situations e Traction control system TCS which functions to help avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction e Electronic stability control ESC which functions to help avoid skids or lateral slides e Roll Stability Control RSC which functions to help avoid a vehicle roll over The AdvanceTrac with RSC system automatically enables each time the engine is started All features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system TCS ESC and RSC are active and monitor the vehicle from start up However the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it The AdvanceTrac with RSC system includes an AdvanceTrac with RSC control button on the center of the instrument panel and a sliding car icon 5 in the instrument cluster The sliding car icon 4 in the instrument cluster will illuminate if a driving situation causes the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate If the sliding car icon illuminates steadily verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC button located on the center stack of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon j remains steadily illuminated have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information 280 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA f
383. smission is in P Park To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire be sure that the parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked If the vehicle slips off the jack someone could be seriously injured 334 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Front Note Use the frame rail as the jacking location point NOT the control arm Note For F 150 SVT Raptor you must always use the jack saddle extension e Rear Note Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point WARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire 335 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 6 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 7 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 8 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 9 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification e Six lug nut wheel e Seven lug
384. speed difference is too high during an engagement attempt e The system has malfunctioned and will be accompanied by a CHECK 4X4 message in the message center Note If the ELD has difficulty disengaging release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling Driving off road with truck and utility vehicles 4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the road How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car 307 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Maintain steering wheel control at all times especially in rough terrain Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside Do not grip the spokes Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving Map out your route before driving in the area To maintain steering and
385. stomers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Cltems in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 351 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety
386. strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with tether straps i Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring 214 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety
387. t when they weigh about 40 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit 218 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Res
388. t heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door armrest To operate the heated seats e Push the indicated side of the control for maximum heat e Push again to deactivate 165 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Push the indicated side of the control for minimum heat e Push again to deactivate The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle While the ignition is in the on position activating the high or low heated seat switch enables heating mode When activated they will turn off automatically when the engine is turned off The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been activated SAFETY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant classifications and conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy mana
389. t in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 50 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way to connect your portable music f player to the in vehicle audio O system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system refer to Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation system supplement Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of y
390. t panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press the MAX A C button again for normal A C operation 7 PASS TEMP Press to activate separate passenger temperature control and turn the dial to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the passenger in the front of the vehicle 8 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except G7 defrost When the ignition switch is turned off and back on the climate system will return to the recirculated air mode only if the A C button LED is illuminated and the air distribution selection is either panel or 4 panel floor 9 e Passenger heated seat control Press to control the passenger heated seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 10 a Driver heated seat control Press to control the driver heated seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 11 Power Driver temperature Press to activate deactivate the climate contr
391. tarily when 4x2 two wheel drive high is selected If X the light fails to display when the ignition is turned on or remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Four wheel drive low RTT 4x4 Cif equipped Displays when four wheel drive low is engaged If LOW the light fails to display when the ignition is turned on or remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Four wheel drive high RTT 4x4 if equipped Displays when four wheel drive high is engaged If HIGH the light fails to display when the ignition is turned on or remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer All wheel drive RTT Cif equipped Displays when using the AWD system AWD Electronic locking differential RTT if equipped Displays when using the electronic locking differential Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated 17 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Anti theft system Flashes when A the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft System has been activated i Turn signal lluminates when the left or right turn signal or the lt i o gt hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb D Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition i
392. tate seat cushion up until it locks into vertical storage position Returning the seat to seating position WARNING Make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to its original position and that the seat cushion locks into place Failure to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of a crash which could increase the risk of serious injury 1 Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from storage position 2 Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position Folding up the rear seats SuperCrew vehicles only The rear seat has a split 60 40 cushion Each seat cushion can be flipped up into a vertical storage position 163 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Rotate seat cushion up by lifting gt on the corner until it locks into vertical storage position Returning the seat to seating position WARNING Before returning the seat cushion to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the seat cushion 1 Pull control on the bottom of the seat cushion to release seat cushion from storage position 2 Push seat cushion down until it rests into the horizontal position Armrest and cupholders if equipped Pull the strap located on the center seatback to access the armrest and c
393. te sirirrsosniinss 113 114 Tilt steering wheel 85 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 241 MURS senaren menn 225 227 330 alignment vicesiacnssscescateevtaseancdes 234 CAN E AEE E A EE E E E 230 CHANING fuseisgsipaniisas 330 333 checking the pressure 230 WTAE sisoes sais sgyevdeciassbankecnerssess 228 lapel ederrenean ennta 240 replacing ccnsracehesxeseiccecateneanees 231 POUAGING aee eE 234 safety practices ssseess0s0 233 sidewall information 235 snow tires and chains 248 Spare TPO recens ietin 330 terminology cresien 227 tire Strade S cecsicncts ds ccevecnatneatess 226 read Wear eurin 226 230 TOWING eere EE 256 recreational towing 04 269 Trailer Brake Controller Integrated 263 trailer towing eee 256 Trailer Brake Controller Integrated 263 Transfer case fluid checking uu 396 TRANSMISSION yesasia 291 brake shift interlock BSD siteacenisaieatceadah 287 289 fluid checking and adding automatic 2 eee 393 395 fluid refill capacities 400 lubricant specifications 400 TUM Signal perreini 76 U Universal garage door OPCNER eree aeran eE 104 USB POLG arr ssopa arra 52 Vv Vehicle Identification Number VINY ase53icsisccesasanivanccsastiveiesSesn cise 406 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Vehicle loa
394. tection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education and 203 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http Awww sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 Chttp www tc gc ca Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers
395. ted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Integrated trailer brake controller if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic Trailer Brake Controller TBC When used properly the TBC helps ensure smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer s electric brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle s brake pressure WARNING The Ford TBC has only been verified to be compatible with trailers having electric actuated drum brakes one to four axles and not hydraulic surge or electric over hydraulic types It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer brakes are adjusted appropriately functioning normally and all electric connections are properly made The TBC user interface consists of the following 1 GAIN adjustment buttons Pressing these buttons TRAILER BRAKE will adjust the TBC s power output to the trailer brakes in LJ JL 0 5 increments The GAIN setting O can be increased to a maximum of 10 0 or decreased to a minimum of 0 mo trailer braking Press
396. ter in it s housing making sure that the far forward end is all the way up in the housing Then push in on the center of the outside edge of the filter and rotate up into the housing until it clips into position REAR SEATS Second row head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with 2nd row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion The adjustable head restraints consist of 1 e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e a guide sleeve adjust release button 3 e and a guide sleeve unlock remove 4 button 4 160 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint A 2 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve adjust release button and pushing down on the head restraint 4 lt _ Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extr
397. th Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Note Do not place chains on the following tires sizes P265 60R18 P275 65R18 LT275 70R17 LT275 65R18 LT315 70R17 P275 55R20 and P275 45R22 248 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e Use only SAE Class S chains e Install chains securely verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines e Drive cautiously If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and re tighten the chains If this does not work remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire chains on dry roads The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper
398. th or use Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 For general cleaning use mild soapy water and a soft damp cloth then dry with a clean dry cloth or use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 307 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning For removal of fine scuffs and scratches use Scotch Brite Microfiber Cloth or cheese cloth along with Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Paint Sealant ZC 45 or Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Note Removal of deep scuffs and scratches should be performed by an authorized dealer or an experienced repair facility Low gloss paint area The low gloss area of the instrument panel s upper dash should be cleaned with mild soapy water and a soft damp cloth then dried with a clean dry cloth When cleaning the low gloss areas e Do not use paper towels or newspaper e Do not use silicone or Teflon PTFE based products e Do not use exterior paint waxes or sealants Dust the low gloss areas with a clean dry cloth or use Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from
399. that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants like infants 167 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints in rear facing child seats this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back WARNING Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in
400. the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH Displayed when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information 29 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected speed Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information TOP SPEED MY KEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO Displayed when a MyKey is in use and Belt Minder is activated Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac system and the optional setting is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information S
401. the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press the MAX A C button again for normal A C operation 7 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except G7 defrost When the ignition switch is turned off and back on the climate system will return to the recirculated air mode only if the A C button LED is illuminated and the air distribution selection is either panel or 4 panel floor 8 4 Passenger heated seat Press to control the passenger heated seat Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 65 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 9 PASS TEMP Press to engage disengage separate passenger side temperature control Turn to increase decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle The recommended initial setting is between 72 F 22 C and 75 F 24 C then adjust for comfort The passenger side temperature setting will appear in the
402. the limited volume e The AdvanceTrac system cannot be turned off When this optional setting is on the MyKey user will not be able to deactivate the system Note It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac system if the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand 141 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Create a MyKey To program MyKey on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle insert the key that you want to make a MyKey into the ignition Turn the ignition on Use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed 2 Press and release the RESET button HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM MYKEY will be displayed 3 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS AS RESTRICTED is displayed 4 Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed MyKey is successfully programmed Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the Admin keys Note To program the optional settings go to step 2 in the Programming MyKey Optional Settings section If your vehicle is equipped with remote start see the Using MyKey with Remote Start Systems section Note The MyKey can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was created otherwise a standard key Administrator key is required to disable the MyKey programming To clear all MyKeys go to step 2 in the Disable MyKey section Programming
403. the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has turned off the passenger s frontal airbag the pass airbag off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is off See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section of this chapter Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage Refer to Safety belt usage sensors later in this chapter 168 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front outboard safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in side collisions and rollovers This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front outboard safety belt energy ma
404. the step or grab handle deployed e Replace slip resistance tape serviceable item if worn out e Replace handle molding serviceable item if damaged e Do not tow with grab handle or step frame Box side step if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a box side step that allows easier access to the truck bed Note Do not drive vehicle with box side step s in the deployed position Note The Box Side Step load carrying capability 1 person cargo is 500 Ibs 227 kg Do not exceed 500 lbs 227 kg 4 To deploy the box side step with your foot push down on the button The step will automatically extend out from the stowed position Note The box side steps may operate slower in cooler temperatures In adverse conditions debris such as mud dirt snow ice and salt may become trapped in the box side step mechanism possibly causing the box side step to not deploy automatically after pressing the button If this occurs ensure that the button is pressed down carefully manually pull out the box side step wash off the debris with a high pressure car wash wand and re stow the step 116 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To stow the box side step with your foot push the box side step under the truck until fully latched Do not push on the button while stowing the box side step Note Do not use the box side steps to lift the vehicle when jacking Utilize proper j
405. ting properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 289 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If the fuse is not blown and the brakelamps are working properly the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P Park 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition key to the off position and remove the key 2 Starting at the rear of the trim panel using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully pry up the trim panel from rear attachments and disconnect it from the console to expose the inside of the gearshift 3 Locate the brake shift interlock lever on the passenger side of the shifter assembly 4 Apply the brake pedal Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the brake shift interlock lever while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park position and into the N Neutral position 5 Install the trim panel 6 Apply brake pedal start the vehicle and release the parking brake See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning
406. tion can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park automatic transmission A memory seat position may be programmed at any time The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter c unlock control and the transmitter is programmed to a memory seat position or when you enter a valid customer code 1 or 2 on the keypad To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter Note The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled Easy access easy out feature if equipped The easy entry feature automatically moves the driver s seat 2 inches 5 cm forward when e the transmission is in P Park e the key is inserted into the ignition cylinder Cf the seat is located less than 2 inches 5 cm from the front of the seat track the seat will travel up to 1 4 inch 64 cm to the front of the seat track 155 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The easy out feature automatically moves the driver s seat 2 inches 5 cm backward when e the transmission is in P Park e the key is removed from the ignition cylinder If the seat is located less than 2 inches 5 cm from the rear of the seat track the seat will travel up to 1 4 inch 64 cm to the rear of the seat track If the memory s
407. tion under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect o
408. to is selected For further information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH if equipped Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter 28 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD if equipped May display when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Four wheel drive 4WD operation in the Driving chapter TRAILER CONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a correct trailer connection a trailer with electric trailer brakes is sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE if equipped
409. to receive cool air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance Max A C Max A C mode Move the temperature control to the coolest setting Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust to maintain comfort Panel 74 and panel floor 4 modes Move the temperature control to the coolest setting Select A C and recirculated air SO Use recirculated air with A C to provide colder airflow Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust to maintain comfort To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select A 2 Select A C 3 4 5 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort Set the fan speed to the highest setting Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel 61 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH HEATED SEATS IF EQUIPPED b MAXA C Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 1 Fan speed control Press to increase the fan speed 2 QV Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and de mister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice The system wil
410. tongue adjusts to your movement However if you brake hard turn hard or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph 8 km h or more the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement Lap belts Adjusting the lap belt Front center seat position SuperCab and SuperCrew only WARNING The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips not across the waist The front center lap belt tongue is designed to fit only in the correct buckle The tongue will not securely latch if you attempt to use it in any of the outboard seating position buckles To ensure that you have used the correct buckle you should hear a snap and feel it latch e Front center lap belt The lap belt does not adjust automatically Insert the tongue into the correct buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from To lengthen the belt turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle To tighten the belt pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips 174 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use For long term storage the lap belt can be placed into a pocket found on the inside lid of the storage compartment To store the lap belt do the following 1 Open the storage compartment lid 2 Place the lap b
411. traint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained 213 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions center seating use The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 652 mm 25 7 inches apart The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments do not tighten the tether
412. traint system SRS section for additional details Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system 153 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Move the switch in the direction of the arrows to raise or lower the 4 front portion of the seat cushion l Move the switch in the direction of the arrows to raise or lower the rear 4 portion of the seat cushion Press the switch in the direction of the arrows to move the seat forward backward up or down Power recline if equipped Press the control to recline the seatback forward or rearward a gt N 154 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Memory seat power mirrors adjustable pedals steering column if equipped This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat outside rearview mirrors adjustable Ly pedals and steering column to two programmable positions The memory seat control is located on the driver s seat 2s e To program position one move the driver seat exterior mirrors adjustable pedals and steering column to the desired positions using the associated controls Press and hold control button 1 for at least two seconds e To program position two repeat the previous procedure using control button 2 A posi
413. traints When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 86 kg or upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 lb 86 kg Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips e Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless bo
414. ts Note Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off position 3 After idling for a few seconds release the parking brake apply the brake shift into gear and drive Note If the engine does not start on the first try turn the key to the off position wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again keeping the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above cranking speeds this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Cold weather starting flexible fuel vehicles only The starting characteristics of all grades of Egs ethanol make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol As the outside temperature approaches freezing ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade ethanol same as with unleaded gasoline If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions 0 F to 32 F 18 C to 0 C you may experience increased cranking times rough idle or hesitation until the engine has warmed up You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is cold when operating on Egs ethanol Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter damage may occur If the engine fails to start turn the key to off and wa
415. ts The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging e 2 Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e 122 Distributes air through the instrument panel vents floor vents rear seat floor vents and de mister vents e Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents 59 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 4 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C 7 defrost and GA floor defrost 5 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except G7 defrost When the ignition switch is turned off and back on the climate system will return to the recirculated air mode only if the A C button LED is illuminated and the air distribution selection is either 74 panel or 4 panel floor 6 MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors
416. ts are working Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Using a step bumper if equipped The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a ball with a one inch 25 4 mm shank diameter The bumper has a 5 000 lb 2 270 kg trailer weight and 500 lb 227 kg tongue weight capacity If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position a frame mounted trailer hitch must be installed Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e To ensure proper break in of powertrain components do not trailer tow during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle e To ensure proper break in of powertrain components during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing drive no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts e Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades e Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer e Anticipate stops and brake gradually e Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur e For additional information refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for more information
417. turn the adjuster either counterclockwise to adjust down or clockwise to adjust up aligning the upper edge of the light pattern up to the horizontal line 6 HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE 7 Repeat Steps 3 5 for the other headlamp 8 Close the hood and turn off the lamps 75 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 4 D e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal 4 Push and hold up or down to the first detent to signal a lane change INTERIOR LAMPS Front row map lamps if equipped To turn on the map lamps press the outer edge of the clear lens The front row map lamp lights when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated until the courtesy lamps come on e the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off Rear dome lamp if equipped ON or DE The dome light will stay on e DOOR or middle position The dome light will only come on if a door is opened e OFF or The lamp will not come on at all The rear dome lamp can be turned on or off by sliding the control 76 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Rear dome courtesy lamps if equipped The dome lamp lights when e any door is opened
418. ty some vehicles require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS equipped on these vehicles is designed to illuminate the Low Tire Pressure Warning indicator at two different pressures one for the front tires and one for the rear tires Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and maximum tire life the Tire Pressure Monitoring System needs to know when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the front and which are on the rear With this information the system can detect and properly warn of low tire pressures TPMS reset tips e To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle the TPMS reset procedure should be performed at least 3 feet 1 meter away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS reset procedure at the same time e Do not wait more than two 2 minutes between resetting each tire sensor or the system will timeout and the entire procedure will have to be repeated on all four wheels e A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure Performing the TPMS reset procedure It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting 1 Drive the vehicle above 20 mph 82 km h for at least 2 minutes and then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires and have access to an air pump 2 Place the ignition in the off p
419. u adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has an auto dimming function optional on the driver s side exterior mirror The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the interior mirror When the interior mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle the interior rear view mirror and the driver s side exterior mirror Gf equipped will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare 93 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Note If equipped with a rearview camera system a video image will display in the mirror or the Navigation system display Gif equipped when the vehicle is put in R Reverse As you shift into any other gear from R Reverse the image will remain for a few seconds and then tu
420. uide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Disabling trailer sway control Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle See trailer sway control under the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note that regardless of chosen enable state trailer sway control will be re enabled at each new key cycle WARNING Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental e g hill climbing the driver has significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system e Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power steering fluid level Check for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down
421. uired by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 226 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 87 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability kPa Kilo
422. uld be checked at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C However if fluid is added at this time an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C SSS B nor S Do nor apo C The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature 50 F 95 F 10 C 35 C B or SS DO NOT ADD CI High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or Coo ERE BREESE or L oo nor apo C engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition 394 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission
423. unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained 205 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If you are using a Regular Cab center seat see Installing child safety seats in cinch tongue combination lap and shoulder belt seating position later in this chapter for instructions Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 206 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder p
424. upholders The cupholders are located inside the rear seat armrest To open the cupholders e Push in gently on the center of the plastic panel on the front edge of the armrest The cupholders will partially open e Pull the cupholder fully open before using 164 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To close the cupholders e Push the front edge back into the seat until the cupholders are fully seated e Make sure there is nothing in the cupholders before attempting to close them Make sure that the cupholders are fully seated before stowing the armrest Rear heated seats if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the sea
425. upper right corner of the display 10 aey Passenger cooled seat Press to control the passenger cooled seat Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 11 4 Driver heated seat Press to control the driver heated seat Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 12 ne Driver cooled seat Press to control the driver cooled seat Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 13 Power Driver temperature Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle Turn to increase decrease the air temperature on the driver side of the vehicle The control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when PASS TEMP is disengaged The recommended initial setting is between 72 F 22 C and 75 F 24 C then adjust for comfort The driver side temperature setting will appear in the upper left corner of the display 14 Fan speed control Press to decrease the fan speed 15 A G Rear defroster if equipped Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors the same button will activate both 15 B uy Heated mirrors if equipped Press to a
426. us Driving When AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a normal system self check some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake and or a rumble grunting or grinding noise after startup and when driving off When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac with RSC you may experience the following A slight deceleration of the vehicle e The sliding car 5 indicator light will flash e A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal e If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces You may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe condition e The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual Traction control system TCS Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain traction of the wheels typically when driving on slippery and or hilly road surfaces by detecting and controlling wheel spin Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways which may work separately or in tandem engine traction control and brake traction control Engine traction control works to limit drive wheel spin by momentarily reducing engine power Brake traction control works to limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is slipping Traction control is most active at low speeds During TCS events the sliding car icon f in the instrument cluster will
427. use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield 374 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Do not mix coolants Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Note Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible W
428. use only UNLEADED FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL Ed75 Ed85 If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle FFV then only use UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended 383 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage FFV engine if equipped If your vehicle is flex fuel capable it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol Ed75 Ed85 Regular unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels Use
429. using the Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons procedure and then programming all of the devices being used Fixed code programming Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter 1 To program units with fixed code DIP switches you will need the garage door hand held transmitter paper and a pen or pencil 2 Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to right for all 8 to 12 switches Use the figure below When a switch is in the up on or position circle L When a switch is in the middle neutral or 0 position circle M When a switch is in the down off or position circle R 7 8 9 10 11 12 alaaa ala Switch position 10 11 12 OA ce ee L neutral or 0 Down offor R R R R R R R R R L left M middle R right 111 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 3 To input these positions into the Car2U system simultaneously press all three Car2U system buttons for a few seconds and then release to put the device into programming mode The indicator lights will blink slowly Within 2 5 minutes enter your corresponding DIP switch settings from left to right into your Car2U system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the settings you circled 4 A
430. utton from 5 20 seconds during which time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves When the button is released the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete 4 Press and release the button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful If your garage door does not operate repeat the previous steps in this section After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home lighting repeat Steps 1 through 4 substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener For example you could assign the left most button to the garage door the center button to a security device and the right most button to another garage door opener 110 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Note The Car2U system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it is necessary to erase the current settings
431. ve minutes or until the safety belts are buckled The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled The Belt Minder feature is suspended the safety belt warning light remains illuminated but the warning chime does not sound This time does not count towards the five minute expiration time 181 Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort T was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t work Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in li
432. vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert Fasten Safety Belt Airbag Side Child Seat Tether Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System Master Lighting Switch Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Defrost Demist 10 AN A xe il O CA a See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist E o O Q gt DFO ous 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Payee WONS a Power Window Lockout BAY Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage a Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm gt Engine Oil A Engine Coolant Temperature E yr Engine Coolant X DOPO Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steerin
433. vehicles not equipped with rear defrost press the heated mirror control located on the climate control panel For more information refer to the Climate Controls chapter Note If your vehicle is equipped with the Auto dimming feature the mirror glass is thicker and will take longer to defrost Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator if equipped When the vehicle turn signal is activated the lower portion of the mirror housing will blink This feature provides an indicator to the driver that the vehicle turn signal is working properly Telescoping trailer tow mirrors if equipped The telescoping feature allows the mirror to extend approximately 3 5 inches 90 mm This feature is especially useful to the driver when towing a trailer Pull the mirrors inward carefully when driving through a narrow space POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P Park position 96 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator
434. verload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your owner s guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS AWD and AWD Systems if equipped A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD when selected has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot 223 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel
435. ward if the easy entry exit feature is activated Steps 2 through 6 must be performed within a 20 second period The easy entry exit feature will be deactivated Repeating the above process will also reactivate the easy entry exit feature 156 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Heated seats if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats do the following e Press control located on the instrument panel to set at high heat e Press control again to set at low heat 0 e Press again to deactivate The indicator
436. when a four wheel drive fault is present Refer to Message center in this chapter Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer 14 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABS Airbag readiness If this light fails ORQ to illuminate
437. when the ignition is A turned to on continues to flash or TG remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will sound if there is a malfunction in the indicator light Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature Charging system RTT Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Engine oil pressure RTT Displays when the oil pressure falls ss below the normal range Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 15 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Door ajar RTT Displays when the ignition is in the on position and J any door is open oD Engine coolant temperature E RTT Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Hluminates when your ti
438. with a gas generator concealed behind the headliner and in the corner or C pillar behind the doors e A headliner designed to flex open above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors located on the C pillar one on each side SuperCab and SuperCrew only e Crash sensors located on the front doors e Rollover sensor in the restraints control module RCM The Safety Canopy system in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision or rollover event Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the second row seats The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The Safety Canopy system is designed to active when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the RCM to initiate Safety Canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor 197 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats The Safety Canopy is
439. wo step and one step door unlocking by pressing and holding both the A and ma buttons simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately four seconds and release The lamps will flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has switched to one step unlocking Repeat the procedure to switch back to two step unlocking Locking the doors 1 Press A and release to lock all the doors The parking lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed and locked Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp once and the turn lamps will illuminate if all the doors are closed If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick chirps and the lamps will not illuminate Car finder Press A twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press P to activate the alarm Press again or turn the ignition to accessory or on to deactivate Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off position Memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals steering column if equipped The remote entry transmitter allows you to recall the memory seat power mirrors adjustable pedals steering column if equipped feature Press to automatically move the seat mirrors adjustable
440. y may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines if equipped INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE HARLEY DAVIDSON EDITION ONLY Your vehicle s instrument panel and console are uniquely painted with both high and low gloss paints that require special care The high gloss area is similar to that of the vehicle s exterior the low gloss area is designed to help protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection High gloss paint area In order to maintain the finish of the instrument panel and console the high gloss areas should be treated similar to the that of exterior paint or glossy plastic surfaces When cleaning the high gloss areas e Do not use paper towels or newspaper e Do not use silicone or Teflon PTFE based products Dust the high gloss areas with a clean dry clo
441. y removed even when full and carried to wherever the contents are needed Each bin will hold up to 60 Ib 27 kg of cargo and has a drain plug for use as a cooler Note When multiple bins are placed on one side of the pickup box the total cargo weight in all bins on that side of the pickup box cannot exceed 60 lb 27 kg To access the lock pull the tab at the base of the rubber cap to uncover the lock When you are done with the lock always reinstall the rubber cap on the lock to ensure proper sealing When the bin is unlocked the rubber cap does not need to be removed to open the bin just press the rubber cap to unlatch the lid e The lock cylinder is keyed to the first ignition key to be turned in the lock This allows one key to work all bins even if more are ordered through the dealer The dealer will usually key the locks during pre delivery but if necessary simply remove the sticker covering the keyhole insert ignition key and turn to the extent of travel in each direction This key will then be the only key to unlock the bin e Once the key has been set simply turn the key to the right to lock or to the left to unlock When locked the push button will not depress when pushed 124 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e To remove the bin from the rail open lid and pull up on both levers located on the outboard edge next to the pickup box top rail until the handles are all th
442. y to restart and may take one additional attempt WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire 321 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Maxi outs Fuse link rating fuses fuses fuses ATE cartridge a Grey Grey o sa Violet Violet _ P44 Pink Pink __ a Tan Tan 758 Brown Brown ioa ra Rea o ia Bwe Blue _ S 254 Natural_ Natural 40A Orange Green Green 508 Red Red Red soa Blue Yellow Yellow Poa ton Brown Peon Natural Black Black Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located und
443. your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 346 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2
444. your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy The Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the engine is turned off the shift data which includes the adaptive information will be stored automatically in the Powertrain Control Module PCM and Transmission Control Module TCM If the battery is disconnected for any reason the stored information from the last time the key was turned to off will be read This way no information will be lost with any battery removal or battery disconnect 293 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving P Park This position locks the transmission PRND321 and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Start the engine e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear If your vehicle is equipped with a floor shift transmission press the gearshift lever release button on the front of the lever while shifting into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and secu
445. your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon C indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon K indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 390 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon C4 indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are
446. zed dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM C Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system 389 2010 F 150 f12 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Toshiba Satellite L775-S7350    Inhaltsverzeichnis Cadillac Escalade  ＜物 件＞ 無線LAN親機及びネットワークディスク他 購入仕様書 1 物件  Appels  Remplacement des piles Mises en garde au sujet des - Fisher  ー取扱い上の注意  FR COUCOU EN BOIS RADIO-GUIDÉ Réf.25776 MODE D`EMPLOI  取扱説明書 - 三菱電機  取扱説明書[総合 ﾃﾞｼﾞﾀﾙ]  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file